manualshive.com logo in svg

LG M6100, User Manual, Page: 55 / 265

Share
Download
LG M6100 User Manual Download Page 55

54

ﻞﺋﺎﺳﺮﻟا

 نﺎﻜﻣ ﻞﻳﺪﺒﺗ ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳ :

ةرﻮﺼﻟاو ﺺﻨﻟا ﻦﻴﺑ ﻞﻳﺪﺒﺘﻟا

  -  

.ﺔﻟﺎﺳﺮﻟا ﻲﻓ ﺺﻨﻟاو ةرﻮﺼﻟا

 ﺔﺻﺎﺧ ﺔﻤﻠﻛ ﺔﻓﺎﺿإ ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳ :

T9 سﻮﻣﺎﻗ ﺔﻓﺎﺿ إ 

  •  

 ﻊﺿو ﻦﻴﻴﻌﺗ ﺪﻨﻋ ﻂﻘﻓ ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟا هﺬﻫ  رﺎﻬﻇإ ﻢﺘﻳ .ﻚﺑ

.T9abc/T9Abc/T9ABC/ ﻲﻓ ﺮﻳﺮﺤﺘﻟا

 ﺎ ًﻀﻳأ ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳ .T9 لﺎﺧدإ ﻊﺿﻮﻟ ﺔﻐﻟ دﺪﺣ :

T9 تﺎﻐﻟ 

  •  

 "T9 off" ﺪﻳﺪﺤﺘﺑ T9 لﺎﺧدإ ﻊﺿو ﻂﻴﺸﻨﺗ ءﺎﻐﻟإ

.ﻊﺿو لﻮﺣ ﻞﻴﺻﺎﻔﺘﻟا ﻦﻣ ﺪﻳﺰﻤﻟ .(T9 فﺎﻘﻳإ)

 ،ﺔﻟﺎﺳر ﺔﺑﺎﺘﻛ ءﺎﻨﺛأ رﺎﻴﺨﻟا اﺬﻫ ﺪﻳﺪﺤﺘﺑ ﺖﻤﻗ اذإ :

جوﺮﺧ 

  •  

 ﺔﻟﺎﺳﺮﻟا نأ ﺎﻤﻛ .ﺔﻟﺎﺳﺮﻟا ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻗ ﻰﻟإ كﺪﻴﻌﻴﺴﻓ

.ﺎﻬﻈﻔﺣ ﻢﺘﻳ ﻦﻟ ﺔﺑﻮﺘﻜﻤﻟا

 جاردإ ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳ .[جاردإ] ﻦﻤﻳﻷا رﺎﻴﺘﺧﻻا حﺎﺘﻔﻣ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻂﻐﺿا  .5

 تﻮﺻو ،تﻮﺻو ،ةﺪﻳﺪﺟ ةرﻮﺻ ءﺎﺸﻧإ وأ ،ةرﻮﺻ وأ ،ﺰﻣر

  .ﺪﻳﺪﺟ

2.5 ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻘﻟا

 دراﻮﻟا قوﺪﻨﺻ

 ﺎﻬﻨﻳﺰﺨﺗ ﻢﺘﻴﺳ ﺚﻴﺣ .ﻞﺋﺎﺳر مﻼﺘﺳا ﺪﻨﻋ ﻚﻬﻴﺒﻨﺗ ﻢﺘﻴﺳ

 ﻞﻛ ﻒﻳﺮﻌﺗ ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳ دراﻮﻟا قوﺪﻨﺻ ﻲﻓ .دراﻮﻟا قوﺪﻨﺻ ﻲﻓ

 ﻪﻴﺟﻮﺘﻟا ﺮﻈﻧا ،ﻞﻴﺻﺎﻔﺘﻟا ﻰﻠﻋ لﻮﺼﺤﻠﻟ .زﻮﻣﺮﻟﺎﺑ ﺔﻟﺎﺳر

.زﻮﻣﺮﻟﺎﺑ صﺎﺨﻟا

ﺰﻣﺮﻟا ﻰﻨﻌﻣ

 

ﺰﻣﺮﻟا

 

ةدﺪﻌﺘﻣ ﻂﺋﺎﺳو ﺔﻟﺎﺳر

 

 

ةﺮﻴﺼﻗ ﺔﻟﺎﺳر

 

 

SIM ﺔﻟﺎﺳر

 

 

ةدﺪﻌﺘﻣ ﻂﺋﺎﺳو ﺔﻟﺎﺳر ةءاﺮﻗ

 

 

ﺔﻴﺼﻧ ﺔﻟﺎﺳر ةءاﺮﻗ

 

 

Push ﺔﻟﺎﺳر

 

 

Push ﺔﻟﺎﺳر ةءاﺮﻗ

 

 

مﻼﻋﻺﻟ ةدﺪﻌﺘﻣ ﻂﺋﺎﺳو ﺔﻟﺎﺳر

 

 

 |

 ﻞﺋﺎﺳﺮﻟا

Summary of Contents for M6100

Page 1: ... ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ إﻟﻰ ً ا اﺳﺘﻨﺎد وذﻟﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﺎرﺳ ENGLISH ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ﻓﺎرﺳ ENGLISH M6100 USER S GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider P N MMBB0188408 1 0 ...

Page 2: ... اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم دﻟﻴﻞ M6100 ﻋﻦ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ إﻟﻰ ً ا اﺳﺘﻨﺎد وذﻟﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻲ ﻋﺮ ...

Page 3: ...ﻒ 21 ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ واﻟﺮد اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﺟﺮاء 22 اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺿﺒﻂ 22 ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮد 23 ﻧﺺ إدﺧﺎل 27 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 31 اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺳﺮد 33 واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ 34 اﻻوﺿﺎع 36 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺳﺠﻞ 36 ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮد ﻟﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت 36 واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت 36 ﺻﺎدرة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت 37 اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺣﺬف 37 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 38 GPRS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت 39 ادوات 39 اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 39 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث 40 اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 41 اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺤﻮل 41 اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ت اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻲ 41 اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺮد 43 اﻟﻤﻮد...

Page 4: ...ﻘﺎط 66 اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا 67 ﺻﻮري 68 اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 68 اﻟﺼﻮت ﻞ ّ ﻣﺴﺠ 69 اﻹﻋﺪادات 70 اﻹﻋﺪادات 70 واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ 70 اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻋﺪادات 71 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﻋﺪادات 74 اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ إﻋﺪادات 76 اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻋﺪادات 77 GPRS إﻋﺪادات 77 اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺎدة 77 اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 78 ﺧﺪﻣﺎت 79 اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ 82 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ا اﻋﺘﻤﺎد SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 83 ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت 83 واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ اﻻﻟﻌﺎب 84 اﻟﺼﻮر 85 اﻷﺻﻮات 85 اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ 89 اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت 91 ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ...

Page 5: ...ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺣﻮل ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم دﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﺮﺟﺎء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬا وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل أﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ دﻗﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ اﻟﻮاردة اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺳﻮء أو ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺘﻠﻒ إﻟﺤﺎق وﺗﺠﻨﺐ اﻷداء ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت أو اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع أي إﺟﺮاء اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺆدي ﻗﺪ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم دﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺮاﺣﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﻀﻤﺎن إﻟﻐﺎء إﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ...

Page 6: ... إﺟﺮاء ﻳﺘﻢ SAR ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إرﺳﺎل ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎري أﺳﻠﻮب ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ اﻟﺘﺮدد ﺣﺰم ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺑﻴﻦ اﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎت وﺟﻮد إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ LG ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﻮدﻳﻼت اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص ﻣﻌﺪل SAR ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ﻟﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ أن إﻻ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ SAR اﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ اﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص ﻟﻤﻌﺪل ﺑﻪ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻷﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻹﺷﻌﺎع ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ 10 ﻋﺸﺮة ﻓﻮق ﺟﺮام ﻛﻴﻠﻮ و...

Page 7: ... ﻻ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻲ اﻟﻜﺤﻮل أو اﻟﻄﻼء اﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻔﺮط ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ أو ﻟﻸدﺧﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻫﺬه ﺗﻌﺮض ﻻ ﺗﺬاﻛﺮ أو اﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎن ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻻ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ أن اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻮاﺻﻼت اﻟﻤﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ اﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ وإﻻ ﺣﺎدة ﺑﺄداة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻻ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ أو ﻟﻠﺴﻮاﺋﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻻ ﺣﺮص ﺑﻜﻞ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺸﻮش ﻟﻠﺘﺪاﺧﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﺪ اﻟﺠﻮاﻟﺔ اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷداء ...

Page 8: ...ﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ اﻟﺘﺮدد ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ ً ﻼ ﻣﺜ اﻷﻣﺎن وﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺴﺎرﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻖ ﻓﻼ ﻫﻮاﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﺰودة ﺳﻴﺎرﺗﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ إذا أن اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻤﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ أو ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮة ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎت اﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ اﻷﻟﻐﺎم ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻧﺘﺒﻪ اﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﻘﻴﺎم أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ أو ﻟﻮاﺋﺢ أي ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع وﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﻟﻠﺤﺪود ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎل اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ وﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮد اﻟﺘﺰود ﻣﺤﻄﺎت دا...

Page 9: ...ﺷﺒﻜﺎت ﻓﻲ اﻟﻄﻮارئ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﺘﺎح ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ أن ً ا أﺑﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻻ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰود ﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻟﻄﻮارئ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ واﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﻋﺎدة ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ إﻓﺮاغ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ اﻷﺧﺮى اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت أﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺒﺨﻼف اﻟﺸﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أداء ﻣﻦ ﻳﻀﻌﻒ أن ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺬاﻛﺮة ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ أي ﺗﻢ ﻟﻘﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ LG وﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﺳﻮى ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ LG ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ داﺋﺮﺗ...

Page 10: ...ﻠﺰم اﻟﺬي اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺤﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ اﻟﻤﺮات ﻟﻔﺘﺮة اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﺪم ﺣﺎل ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﺪ أ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺮة ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ زﻣﻨﻴﺔ وﻻ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻟﻀﻮء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻻ اﻟﻤﻴﺎه دورات ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻗﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﻷن اﻟﺒﺎردة أو اﻟﺤﺎرة اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺗﺘﺮك ﻻ أداﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ واﻟﻔﻌﺎل اﻵﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎت ...

Page 11: ...ﻒ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر إﺟﺮاء أﺛﻨﺎء اﻷذن ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2 اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺮأس ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ 3 اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﺮأس ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻞ MP3 اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 4 اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ا ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮل اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻬﺬا ﻗﺼﻴﺮة ﺿﻐﻄﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ MP3 ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻟﻬﺬا ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ 1 2 3 4 M6100 ﻣﻴﺰات ...

Page 12: ...ﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺗﺮﺑﺔ وﺟﻮد ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﻔﻼش 2 اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺤﺰام ﻓﺘﺤﺔ 3 اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ زر 4 اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﻔﻚ اﻟﺰر ﻫﺬا اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ 5 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 6 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أﻃﺮاف 7 اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ أﻃﺮاف 8 اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ 9 3 1 2 4 6 5 7 8 9 M6100 ﻣﻴﺰات ...

Page 13: ...ﺘﺎح ﻛﻞ اﻹرﺳﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 3 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ واﻟﺮد ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت آﺧﺮ إﻟﻰ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﺎ ً أﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮاردة ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ واﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ واﻟﺼﺎدرة اﻟﻮاردة اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح رﻗﻤﻴﺔ أﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 4 اﻟﺤﺮوف ﺑﻌﺾ أو ﺣﺮوف أو أرﻗﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ 6 8 7 10 11 1 2 12 9 3 4 5 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﺘﺢ اﻵﺧﺮ اﻟﻄﺮف ﺳﻤﺎع ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ وﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ M6100 ﻣﻴﺰات ...

Page 14: ...ﻦ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺸﺎر ً ة ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻛﻞ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 9 اﻹﺟﺮاءات وﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 10 إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع ﺎ ً وأﻳﻀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ رﻓﺾ أو ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻫﺬا ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر وﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ إﻳﻘﺎف أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 11 ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺮف ﻟﺤﺬف ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻣﻊ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻫﺬا ﺎ ً أﻳﻀ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ...

Page 15: ...ﻟﻰ ﺷﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ وﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻷذن ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ وﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎم اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ WAP إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ وﺻﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ GPRS اﺳﺘﺨﺪام إﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﺪول أﺣﺪاث ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ Bluetooth ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ M6100 ﻣﻴﺰات ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ا اﻋﺘﻤﺎد اﻟﻤﺤﺎدﺛﺔ ﺟﻮدة ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺷﺮﻳﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ أﻗﻞ اﻹﺷﺎرة ﻗﻮة ﺗﻜﻮن ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ً ﺎ واﻧﻘﻄﺎﻋ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ ً ﺎ ﻛﺘﻤ ﺗﻮاﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻛ...

Page 16: ...15 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ أو اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﺪم ﻓﺠﺐ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺛﻨﺎء أ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ M6100 ﻣﻴﺰات ...

Page 17: ...ﻓﻲ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أدﺧﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﺗﺠﺎه وأن ﻷﺳﻔﻞ اﺿﻐﻂ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮاج ﻷﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎه ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺪوث إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ إﺧﺮاج ﻳﺆدي ﻗﺪ أﻋﻄﺎل SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹدﺧﺎل SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺧﺮاج ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ SIM ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء SIM ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ا ً ﺪ ﺟﻴ اﻧﺘﺒﻪ اﻟﺨﺪش ﻃﺮﻳﻖ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ا...

Page 18: ...ﻤﻮﺟﻮد اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻜﺔ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ اﻵﺧﺮ اﻟﻄﺮف ﺻﻞ 2 ﺑﻌﺒﻮة اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺳﻮى ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻻ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ أﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ 3 اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻛﺘﻤﺎل ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺆدي ﻗﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﻮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻻ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز أو و اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻒ إﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺪك ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻛﻨﺖ ذا إ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ أﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮل ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ أﺛﻨﺎء SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ اﻟﻬﺎﺗ...

Page 19: ... ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ أو اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﺪم ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﺎودة ﺛﻢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻳﻘﺎف إﻋﺎدة ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ أﻋﺪ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ إﻋﺎدة ﺛﻢ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ إﺧﺮاج ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر ﻣﻦ واﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺰع ا ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺪوث ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي اﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻮاﺻﻒ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﺮﻳﻖ أو ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎن اﻟﺤﺎدة اﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻋﺪم ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ أن ﺧﻄﺮ ﻓﻬﻨﺎك ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺔ واﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ا...

Page 20: ... 1 LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل رﻣﻮز اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل رﻣﻮز اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوﺣﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل رﻣﻮز ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻪ اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ PUK2 و PUK رﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام 6 4 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﻣﻮز ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أرﻗﺎم 8 إﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻦ PIN اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ رﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ رﻗﻢ PIN رﻣﺰ ﻳﺤﻤﻲ رﻗﻢ PIN رﻣﺰ ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺎدة اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻃﻠﺐ إﻋﺪاد ﺿﺒﻂ و...

Page 21: ...PUK2 رﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ PUK2 رﻣﺰ ﻳﻠﺰم اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﺪان ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻌﻪ ﺗﻢ PIN2 رﻣﺰ ً ﺎ أﻳﻀ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ أرﻗﺎم 8 إﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ ﻳﻘﻮم 0000 ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﺒﻮط اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﻣﺪﺧﻼت ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﺤﺬف ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ إدﺧﺎل وﻳﻠﺰم ﻛﺬﻟﻚ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ أو ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ إدﺧﺎل ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﻤﺮﺧ...

Page 22: ...ت آﺧﺮ ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ أرﻗﺎم ﻋﺮض ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮد ﻟﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺣﺪد 2 اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ S اﺿﻐﻂ 3 دوﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﺑﺎدﺋﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ 0 اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﻤﺮ 1 ﻛﻮد ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﻟﺪوﻟﻲ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻛﻮد ﺛﻢ اﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻛﻮد ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻗﻢ 2 اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ S اﺿﻐﻂ 3 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﻧﻬﺎء E ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ اﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء...

Page 23: ...ﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ً ﺎ ﻣﺨﺰﻧ ﻛﺎن إذا اﺳﻤﻪ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﻢ واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺮد 1 ﻟﻠﺮد ﻛﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ 2 3 7 ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻزرار اﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻮاردة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺪون وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮد ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻷﺧﺮى اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﻣﻴﺰات أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ أو اﻟﻐﻄﺎء اﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ وﻹﻧﻬﺎء 2 E اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻜﻮن وﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠ...

Page 24: ...و ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺺ إدﺧﺎل ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻄﺮق وﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ T9 وﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺬا ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ إدﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺮف ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ واﺣﺪة ﺿﻐﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻦ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺰود اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ T9 اﻟﻮﺿﻊ وﻳﻘﻮم واﺣﺪ ﺣﺮف ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﻣﻦ ً ا ﺟﺪ اﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﺤﺮوف وﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ اﻟﻤﻔﺎ...

Page 25: ...ﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ T9 وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ واﻟﻤﻌﺮوف T9 اﻟﻨﺺ إدﺧﺎل وﺿﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪد أﻗﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻌﻨﺪ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻄﺎت ﻳﻌﺘﻘﺪ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻷﺣﺮف ﻋﺮض ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻗﺎﻣﻮس ﻋﻠﻰ ً ء ﺑﻨﺎ وذﻟﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ أﻧﻚ T9 ﻟﻐﺔ وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ إﻳﻘﺎف أو T9 وﺿﻊ ﻛﺬل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار اﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻗﻴﺪ T9 اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ اﻟﻨﺺ إدﺧﺎل وﺿﻊ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀ...

Page 26: ... ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ T9 ﻟﻐﺎت ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ T9 ﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺣﺪد إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ T9 وﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻳﻘﺎف ﻛﺬﻟﻚ وﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ اﻹﻋﺪاد T9 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ T9 ﺣﺮف أي ﺣﺬف أو ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻗﻢ 2 اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﻢ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮف أي ﻟﺤﺬف 0 ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﻤﺮ C ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺤﺮوف...

Page 27: ...ﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻹدﺧﺎل 2 ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺤﺮوف ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮف أي ﻟﺤﺬف ﻓﻘﻂ واﺣﺪة C ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﻤﺮ C اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻟﻤﺤﻮ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ً ﺎ وﻓﻘ اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﺮة اﻷﺣﺮف اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح أﺣﺮف 1 1 2 ث ة ت ب 2 3 ء ئ ؤ ى آ إ أ ا 3 4 ض ص ش س 4 5 ز ر ذ د 5 6 خ ح ج 6 7 ى و ه ن 7 8 م ل ك ق ف 8 9 غ ع ظ ط 9 0 اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 0 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﺤﺮوف ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﻔ...

Page 28: ...ﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أدﻧﺎه ﻣﺸﺮوﺣﺔ واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء دﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﺗﺼﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﻠﺒﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ رﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ا...

Page 29: ...ﻟﺮد دون واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ رﻓﺾ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ E اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﻀﻐﻂ واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ رﻓﺾ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل أو رﻓﺾ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر E اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺻﻮت ﻛﺘﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺻﻮت ﻛﺘﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮت ﻛﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻟﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺻﻮت ﻛﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻛﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ا ﻗﺎدر ﺗﻈﻞ أﻧﻚ إﻻ...

Page 30: ...ﻮد اﺳﺘﻤﺮار اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺪد أﻗﺼﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺧﻼل ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﻮ اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ أﻧﺖ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﺪأ أن ﺑﻤﺠﺮد ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ أﻧﺖ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﻃﺮاف ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاﺋﻚ إﺛﻨﺎء ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ S اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ واﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻗﻢ اﻵن ﻗﻴﺪ اﻷوﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟ...

Page 31: ... إﺟﺮاء ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻛﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ أﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮاء اﻟﺬي ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎدﺛﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﺎص ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺧﻴﺎر ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻗﻢ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻗﻴﺪ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ وﺿﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﺣﺪى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ إﺧﺮاج ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﺣﺪى ﻹﻧﻬﺎء E اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ...

Page 32: ... اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺣﺬف 4 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 5 GPRS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت 6 ادوات 3 اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 1 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث 2 اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 3 اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺤﻮل 4 اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ 5 اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺮد 6 اﻟﻤﻮدم 7 اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ 4 اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺠﻞ 1 اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ 2 اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة 3 اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ 4 اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 5 ﺟﺪﻳﺪة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ 1 اﻟﻮارد ﺻﻨﺪوق 2 اﻟﺼﺎدر ﺻﻨﺪوق 3 ﻣﺴﻮدات 4 اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺳﻤﺎع 5 اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 6 ﻧﻤﺎذج 7 اﻻﻋﺪادات 8 اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺳﺮد ...

Page 33: ...5 اﻟﺼﻮت ﻞ ّ ﻣﺴﺠ 6 اﻹﻋﺪادات 7 اﻹﻋﺪادات 7 واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ 1 اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻋﺪادات 2 اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت إﻋﺪادات 3 اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ إﻋﺪادات 4 اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻋﺪادات 5 GPRS إﻋﺪادات 6 اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺎدة 7 اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 8 ﺧﺪﻣﺎت 8 اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ 1 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ 2 ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت 9 واﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ اﻻﻟﻌﺎب 1 اﻟﺼﻮر 2 اﻷﺻﻮات 3 اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ 4 اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺳﺮد ...

Page 34: ...ة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪادات وﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺮض ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ وﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺴﻴﺎق ﺣﺴﺐ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ أدوار ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺪور إﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻛﻞ ﻓﻮق ً ة ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ إدﺧﺎﻻت إﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ اﻻﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻤﺎء واﻟﺨﻴﺎرات اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ...

Page 35: ...ﺿﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻧﺘﻘﻞ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 2 ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ أو اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ 3 2 1 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎص ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺪد ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أو اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎر ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﺎص ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻮاردة ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻮع ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮارد اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮت درﺟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺻﻮت درﺟﺔ...

Page 36: ...ﻲ رد اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺣﺮ ﻃﻘﻢ أو اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ً ﻼ ﻣﻮﺻ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﻜﻮن ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺮد ﻟﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺛﻮان 5 ﺑﻌﺪ ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺮد ﺛﻮان 5 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻮان 10 ﺑﻌﺪ ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺮد ﺛﻮان 10 ﺑﻌﺪ 3 1 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﺳﻢ أي وﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻷوﺿﺎع أﺣﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪه اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻟﻮﺿﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻧﺘﻘﻞ اﻷوﺿﺎع أﺣﺪ اﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ 1 اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ اﻷوﺿﺎع ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أو اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ...

Page 37: ...ﺗﺼﺎل وﺟﻮده ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ وﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﺳﻢ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻬﺬا رﺳﺎﻟﺔ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺬف 2 2 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻛﻤﺎ واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت 10 آﺧﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ أو ﺑﻪ واﻻﺗﺼﺎل وﺟﻮده ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ وﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﺳﻢ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻬﺬا رﺳﺎﻟﺔ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺬف 3 2 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﺎدرة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ...

Page 38: ... ﻳﺘﻴﺢ واﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎت ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺎدة ﻛﺬﻟﻚ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ آﺧﺮ ﻣﺪة ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ آﺧﺮ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺪة ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔإﻋﺎدة آﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﺬ وإﺟﺮاؤﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ اﻟﻮاردة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﺪة ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﺎدرة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﺪة ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﺎدرة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺎدة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎت ﻧﻌﻢ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ 2 5 2 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ...

Page 39: ...ات ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺪدت إذا اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺬه ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺗﻢ إذا اﻷﺧﻴﺮة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ رؤﻳﺔ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻷﺧﻴﺮة اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ رؤﻳﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ 6 2 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ GPRS ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ GPRS ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ 1 6 2 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺪة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت وﻛﻞ اﻷﺧﻴﺮة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺪة ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺼﻔﺮ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎت...

Page 40: ...ﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺎ ً ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﺎ ً ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻋﺒﺮ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬا ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ اﻟﺮأس ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ اﻟﺬي اﻷﻣﺮ وﻣﺎ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ رﺑﻄﻬﺎ أو ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ إﻟﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ آﺧﺮ Bluetooth ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﺳﺘﻼم ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ وﺑﻌﺪ 2 1 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MP3 اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ MP3 5 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ 3GP اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ VCF اﻟﻬﺎﺗ...

Page 41: ...ة اﻟﻤﺮور ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ 3 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ اﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي واﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ واﻟﻀﺮب واﻟﻄﺮح اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷرﻗﺎم أدﺧﻞ 1 اﻟﺤﺴﺎب ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺳﺘﺨﺪم 2 اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ اﻷرﻗﺎم أدﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ 3 اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل O اﺿﻐﻂ 4 اﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ 5 ادراج ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻗﻤﺖ اذا اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء 6 رﺟﻮع اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ إذا ﻋﻼﻣﺎت أو أرﻗﺎم أي...

Page 42: ...ﻟﻢ ﻟﻤﺪن اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎت ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺣﺪد 1 L R ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﺤﺪدﻫﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ل 2 ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 6 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺮد ﻟﻰ اﻻ ﻟﻠﺮد زك ﺟﻬﺎ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 1 6 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺎم ﻋﺎم ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﻟﻰ اﻟﺮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 2 6 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺟﺘﻤﺎع اﺟﺘﻤﺎع ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﻟﻰ اﻟﺮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 6 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺎدة ﻗﻴﺎدة ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﻟﻰ اﻟﺮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 5 4 6 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2 اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪد دﻟﻴ...

Page 43: ...ﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻠﺔ ّ اﻟﻤﺴﺠ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻲ أن ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﻌﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺤﺬف أن ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﺗﺮك اﻟﺬي ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ أن ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ رﻗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺼﻴﺮة رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ أن ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮك اﻟﺬي ﺼﻞ ّ ﺘ اﻟﻤ اﻟﺸﺨﺺ إﻟﻰ 7 6 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ وﻗﺖ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻵﻟﻲ اﻟﺮد وﺿﻊ ﻂ ّ ﻳﻨﺸ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ إﻟﺮد ﻴﻂ ّ ﺑﺘﻨﺸ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺳﻴﻘﻮم ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ 3 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ 3 ﺑﻌﺪ اﻵﻟﻲ إﻟﺮد...

Page 44: ...43 ادوات 7 3 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮدم ﻛﻨﺖ وإذا اﻟﻤﻮدم ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ Internet أو Contents banks أو PCsync اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ اﻟﻤﻮدم وﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ Cube USB ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ...

Page 45: ...ﺔ إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻟﻤﺤﺪد اﻟﺮﻗﻢ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻋﺒﺮ إرﺳﺎل ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث اﺗﺼﺎل ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت أﺣﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﻌﻜﺲ أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ أو اﻟﻤﻨﺰل أو اﻟﺠﻮال رﻗﻢ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ً ﺎ ﻏﺎﻟﺒ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم واﻟﺬي ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ً ﻻ أو ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺬي اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﻮ ﺳﻴﻜﻮن اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت أﺣﺪ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف...

Page 46: ...اﻟﺮﻗﻢ إدﺧﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ب ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ج ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻺدﺧﺎل ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ د L R ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻺدﺧﺎل ﺣﺮف ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ه L R D U 3 1 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت 7 ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ً ا ﻋﻀﻮ 20 ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﺪوﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻗﻤﺖ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء ﺗﻌﺮض اﻻﻋﻀﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ رﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ رﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ أﻋﻀﺎء ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ...

Page 47: ...ﻟﻚ اﻹدﺧﺎل ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ وﺑﻌﺪ 4 إﻟﻰ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ إرﺳﺎل أو ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ إﺟﺮاء ً ﺎ أﻳﻀ وﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ وﺣﺬﻓﻪ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺬا 5 1 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ أﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻟﻰ اﻧﺘﻘﻞ 2 ﺣﺪد ﺛﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ اﻧﺘﻘﻞ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄل إدﺧﺎل إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺮ ّ ﻣﺘﻐﻴ ﺣﺪدت إذا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ أو SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ إذا ﻣﺎ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺰن اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو SIM ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ إذا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أو...

Page 48: ...ﺎل ﻟﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ذاﻛﺮة إﻟﻰ SIM اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ذاﻛﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ 3 ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﻔﺎظ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﻞ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ اﻷﺻﻠﻲ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل رﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻷﺻﻞ ﺣﺬف اﻷﺻﻠﻲ 7 1 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬف واﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت ﻛﻞ ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺣﺬف وﺣﺪد اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ أﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ...

Page 49: ...ﻫﺬه ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺤﺮة اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت أو اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً ﻻ أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻓﺘﺢ 1 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﺪد اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻧﺘﻘﻞ 2 SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎء رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ وﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺘﻪ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ رﻗﻤﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ SIM 2 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ إﻇﻬﺎر ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه إﻟﻰ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻋﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت وﻛﻠﻤﺎ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ أﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ واﻟﺴﻨﺔ اﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻋﺮض ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺳﻴﻘﻮم اﻹﻋﺪادا...

Page 50: ...2 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮة ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺒﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت 3 2 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺬف إﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻟﻢ اﻟﺬي اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 4 2 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﻛﻞ ﻟﺤﺬف 5 2 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺬﻫﺎب ً ة ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ إﻟﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 6 2 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ اﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺎ ً ﻳ ﺳﻨﻮ 1 3 ﺎ ً ﻳ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺎ ً أﺳﺒﻮﻋﻴ DU ﺎ ً ﻳﻮﻣﻴ L R ...

Page 51: ...ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻢ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺎ إذا 2 إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ اﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮة أدﺧﻞ 3 4 4 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺔ ﺳﺘﻴﻢ اﻟﺬي اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻲ او اﻟﻬﺠﺮي او اﻟﻤﻴﻼدي اﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎن ﺳﻮاء اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻨﺺ إدﺧﺎل ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ أردت ذا إ اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﻮاﻋﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ...

Page 52: ...اﺳﺘﻼم ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺻﻨﺪوق Inbox ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬف Delete اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻮارد اﺳﺘﻼم ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ذاﻛﺮة ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ أي وﺟﻮد ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮة اﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ُﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺗ ﻟﻢ SMS رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أي ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ إدﺧﺎل ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺐ أ 1 ﻧﺺ إدﺧﺎل 25 ﺣﺘﻰ 22 اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ راﺟﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ 2 اﻟﺨﻴﺎراﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮاﻟﺨﻴﺎرات أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ...

Page 53: ...ف رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ذا إ ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ أن ﻛﻤﺎ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻴﺪك ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎت إرﺳﺎل ﺎ ً أﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ إدﺧﺎل أﺛﻨﺎء إدراج اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ إدﺧﺎل أﺛﻨﺎء إدراج اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻧﺼﻴﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ واﺳﺘﻼم إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺮف ﺻﻮر ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﺘﺒﺪاﻟﻬﺎ وﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ إﻋﺎدة ﺻﻮر ﻣﻦ أﺧﺮى ﻣﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪ...

Page 54: ...ﻚ ﺻﻮت أو و ﺻﻮرة إﺿﺎﻓﺔ 2 ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح ﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻢ إذا اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ وﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ٍ ﺬ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ 4 اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ وأﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة أرﻗﺎم إرﺳﺎل إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ إرﺳﺎل إﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋ...

Page 55: ...ﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ إذا ﺧﺮوج اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ أن ﻛﻤﺎ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻟﻰ ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻴﺪك ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ إدراج ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إدراج اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ 5 وﺻﻮت وﺻﻮت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺻﻮرة إﻧﺸﺎء أو ﺻﻮرة أو رﻣﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ 2 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻮارد ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻴﺚ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﺳﺘﻼم ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮارد ﺻﻨﺪوق ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮارد ﺻﻨﺪوق ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮز رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ اﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة وﺳﺎﺋﻂ رﺳﺎﻟ...

Page 56: ...ﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻘﺮاءة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮد ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ رد أﺧﺮى ﺟﻬﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﻋﺎدة ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ رد اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻮل ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت رﺳﺎﺋﻞ أﺟﻞ ﻣﻦ واﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮع اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ وﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ وﻧﻮع ووﻗﺘﻬﺎ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ وﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ وﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻴﺎرا...

Page 57: ...ﺎل اﻵﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﺧﻄﺎر وﻳﺘﻢ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﺬي URL إﻟﻰ WAP ّﺼﺎل ﺗ إ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﻀﺒﻮط اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮن ان ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﻮاب 3 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﺎدر ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ وﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ وﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ً ﺎ ﺑﺤﺜ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ذاﺗﻪ ﻫﻮ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ اﻟﻮارد ﺻﻨ...

Page 58: ... ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﺼﺎدر ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮل ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻜﻞ إرﺳﺎل إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬف إرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ 4 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﻮدات ﻟﻤﺎ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ اﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة وﺳﺎﺋﻂ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻤﺲ إﻟﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ُﻈﻬﺮ ﺗ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺑ...

Page 59: ...ﺤﺼﻮل ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ وذﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ 6 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ واﻻﺷﺘﺮاك اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻟﻰ ً ا اﺳﺘﻨﺎد ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﻮﻓﺮ وﻫﻲ GSM ﻧﻈﺎم إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ واﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎت اﻷﺟﺮة وﺳﻴﺎرات اﻟﻤﺮور وﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻟﻜﻞ ﻳﺨﺼﺺ اﻷﺳﻬﻢ وأﺳﻌﺎر ﻗﻤﺖ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺰود اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺬا ﻣﺤﺪد رﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﻼم ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ اﻟﺮﻗ...

Page 60: ...اﻷﻳﺴﺮ 7 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ًﺎ ﻘ ﻣﺴﺒ اﻟﻤﻌﺪة اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﺎك إﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ وﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﺎن ﻫﻨﺎك ﺟﺪﻳﺪة رﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ورﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ 1 7 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﻤﺎذج اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻤﺎذج ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺟﺪﻳﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﻧﺼﻴﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻺرﺳﺎل ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ إرﺳﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪ...

Page 61: ...اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻛﻞ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬف ﺗﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة 3 7 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺑﻚ اﻟﺨﺎص اﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪك اﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ورﻗﻢ اﻟﺠﻮال اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ورﻗﻢ اﻻﺳﻢ أﻛﺘﺐ اﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ وﻋﻨﻮان اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ورﻗﻢ 8 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻋﺪادات 1 8 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ و ﻣﺤﻠﻲ واﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء وﻓﺎﻛﺲ وﺻﻮت ﻧﺺ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ أﻧﻮاع ERMES و إﻟﻴﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ وﺑﺮﻳﺪ X 400 اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﺎ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻮع ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺎ ﻋﺎدة ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ...

Page 62: ...ﻴﺎرﻫﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺪة ﻫﺬه ﻓﻲ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻢ إذا اﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ إرﺳﺎل ﺗﻢ ﻗﺪ ﻛﺎن ﻣﺎ إذا ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﺠﺎح رﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪدت إذا آﻟﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺣﺪدت إذا ﺎ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺛﻢ وﻣﻦ اﻟﻮارد اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ إﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﻤﺖ إذا اﻹﻋﻼﻣﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬه ﻣﻦ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﻓﺴﻮ...

Page 63: ...اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻮال 4 8 5 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻠﻢ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺣﺪدت إذا ﻧﻌﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻓﻠﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺣﺪدت اذا ﻻ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺼﺪر ﻧﻌﻢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ أرﻗﺎم اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺼﺪر ﻟﻦ ﻻ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻠﻐﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺗ...

Page 64: ...ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 128 16 ﺑﺖ ﻣﻌﺪل V1 AAC اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺖ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 48 16 ﺑﺖ ﻣﻌﺪل V2 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 48 إﻟﻰ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 8 ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﺗﺮدد ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 48 إﻟﻰ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 8 ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﺗﺮدد M4A MP4 ﻓﻲ ﺑﺖ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 320 إﻟﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﺖ وﻣﻌﺪل أﻗﺼﻰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 48 إﻟﻰ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 8 ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت ﺗﺮدد WMA ﻓﻲ ﺑﺖ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ 320 إﻟﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺑﺖ وﻣﻌﺪل أﻗﺼﻰ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﺮ وﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ اﻟﺤﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ً ﺎ ﻣﺸﻮﺷ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻳﻜﻮن...

Page 65: ... 2 اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ إﻟﻰ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎع اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺗﻜﺮار ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺴﻤﺢ رﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ رﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ رﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ MP3 اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻓﻲ إﻋﺪادات ﺑﻴﺌﺎت ﻋﺪة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪك اﻟﻜﻮﻟﻴﺰر 4 اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬا ﻳﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ إﻟﻰ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه إﻟﻰ اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻮا...

Page 66: ...اﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ إذا ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ وﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻋﺮض أو اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺬف ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات 3 1 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻋﺪادات ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔاﻛﻮﻟﻴﺰر اﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺼﺮي وﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺸﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮق ﺗﻜﻮن أن ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻘﻮق وﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﺪوﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻫﺪات ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل اﻟﻀﺮوري ﻣﻦ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻘﺪ وﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ أو اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ إﻧﺘﺎج ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ أو إذن ﻋ...

Page 67: ...ﻲ اﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺖ ّ اﻟﻤﻮﻗ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺟﻮدة ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺠﻮدة اﻹﻋﺪادات ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻀﻮء ﺗﻮازن اﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻈﻬﺮ ُ ﻳ أﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺧﺮوج ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺘﻘﺎط ﻳﺠﺐ ﻛﺎن إذا ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻟﻘﻄﺎت أو واﺣﺪة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺤﺪد ُ ﻳ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﻔﻼش ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﻼش اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ 3 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬا ﻨﻚ ّ ﻤﻜ ُ ﻳ...

Page 68: ...ﻔﺎت إﻇﻬﺎر أﻟﺒﻮم اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺧﺮوج ﻛﻠﻴﺐ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺎص اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﻔﻼش ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﻼش اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ 4 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮري ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ وﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ وإرﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻮرة ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻴﺎرات ﺻﻮر 9 إﻟﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﻋﺮض اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﻐﺮة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺻﻮرة إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﻋﺒﺮ ارﺳﺎل ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮث ﺻﻮرة إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة وﺳﺎﺋﻂ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ MMS ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺻﻮرة ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻳﻤ...

Page 69: ...ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت 6 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻞ ّ ﻣﺴﺠ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰة ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 20 إﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﺮة وﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ رﺳﺎﺋﻞ 10 إﻟﻰ أﻗﺼﻰ ﻛﺤﺪ 1 6 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﻗﺖ إﻇﻬﺎر ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺒﺪأ ﺣﺎﻟﻤﺎ 1 اﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ واﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ إﻧﻬﺎء أردت وإذا 2 ﺣﻔﻆ ا...

Page 70: ...ﺋﻤﺔ اﻹﻋﺪادات 1 7 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ إذا ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ إﻇﻬﺎر دون ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ اﻟﺼﻮر ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺬف ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺼﻮر 2 7 6 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮا ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺗﺴﻤﺢ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ...

Page 71: ...ﻳﻮم ﻳﻮم ﺷﻬﺮ ﺳﻨﺔ 2 1 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ إدﺧﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم إﻣﺎ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 12 أو ﺳﺎﻋﺔ 24 2 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻋﺪادات ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ 1 2 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻋﺪادات وﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺻﻮرة ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻮم أو اﻟﺼﻮر إﺣﺪى ﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ L أو R ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻮم أو اﻟﺼﻮر إﺣ...

Page 72: ... اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺑﺈﺣﺪى اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ 1 3 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮاردة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ وﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺰود اﺗﺼﻞ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل آﺧﺮ رﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮوط ﺑﻼ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﻧﺸﻐﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ً ﻻ ﻣﺸﻐﻮ اﻟﺮد ﻋﺪم ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮد ﻟﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ ا...

Page 73: ... أدﻧﺎه اﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬه ﻋﺮض ﻳﺘﻢ ﻻ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ إﻟﻰ إرﺳﺎل اﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت وﻛﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ آﺧﺮ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ رﻗﻢ إدﺧﺎل ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ أرﻗﺎم 5 آﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض 2 3 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮد وﺿﻊ اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺢ واردة ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ اﺳﺘﻼم ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬه ﺣﺪدت إذا اﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻔﺘﺢ وذﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح أي اﻟﻤ...

Page 74: ... إﻳﻘﺎف ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ رﻗﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻦ 4 3 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻟﻰ ً ا اﺳﺘﻨﺎد ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻮل ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻮل إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﺤﺺ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮض 5 3 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺪة ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪدت إذا اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ إﺷﺎرة ﺻﺪور ﻃﺮﻳﻖ 6 3 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ آاﻟﻴﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل اﻋﺎدة ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ً ﺎ ﻳ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫ...

Page 75: ... ﻣﺮات 10 ﻣﻦ أﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﻞ PUK رﻣﺰ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻨﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ إﻟﻐﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﺰود 2 4 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻤﺖ إذا ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح ﻗﻤﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻤﺖ إذا اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 3 4 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎ...

Page 76: ...ﺎت ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﻞ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﺮور ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺣﻈﺮ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻻ أم ﻣﺤﻈﻮرة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻮاء اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض 5 4 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪد اﺗﺼﺎل رﻗﻢ SIM إﻟﻰ ً ا اﺳﺘﻨﺎد ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺪدة ﻫﻮاﺗﻒ أرﻗﺎم ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﺎدرة اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت ﻟﺤﺼﺮ PIN2 رﻣﺰ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺤﺪدة ...

Page 77: ...5 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ إﻋﺪادات إﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت إﺣﺪى ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺎدة ً ﺎ ﻳﺪوﻳ أو ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ 1 5 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ آﻟﻲ ً ﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﺴﻮف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺪدت إذا ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﻮم أن ﺑﻤﺠﺮد وﻳﺤﺪدﻫﺎ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ إﻳﻘﺎف أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪوي اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎت ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺳﻮف ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤ...

Page 78: ...ﻜﺔ ﺗﺮدد ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬا اﺳﺘﺨﺪم GSM 1900 أو GSM 900 1800 6 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ GPRS إﻋﺪادات ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻇﺮوف ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎء GPRS ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 7 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺎدة إﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎج اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ إﻋﺪادات ﻛﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬه ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ رﻣﺰ 8 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ 1 8 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ داﺧﻠﻴﺔ ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ذاﻛﺮة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬه ُﻈﻬﺮ ﺗ 2 8 7 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ذاﻛﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ذاﻛﺮة ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬ...

Page 79: ...ﺎﺗﻒ رﻗﻢ إﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ أن ﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﻤﺠﺮد أي إﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰود ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺨﺎص URL ﻋﻨﻮان إدﺧﺎل ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ وﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ وﻗﺖ أي ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر وﺿﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻮد ﺳﻮف E WAP ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ أي ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ WAP ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ أو اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻔ...

Page 80: ...ﻌﻴﺔ إﺷﺎرة ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻴﺎرات اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ 1 ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻋﻠﻰ واﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪد 2 ﻋﻠﻰ اﺿﻐﻂ وﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻪ اﻟﻤﺮاد URL ﻋﻨﻮان إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻌﺪ 3 ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﺮ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎل اﺗﺼﺎل إﺷﺎرة ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻫﺬا ﺣﺪد ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻋﻼﻣﺔ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة ﻋﻨﻮان أو و URL ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة ﺣﺬف ﺣﺬف اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ...

Page 81: ... وﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ اﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺳﻴﻘﻮم ﺣﻴﺚ URL ﻋﻨﻮان ﺎ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت 1 GPRS 2 إﻋﺪادات ﺣﺪدت إذا ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﻋﺪادات ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺤﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﻪ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﺬي اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ رﻗﻢ أدﺧﻞ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل رﻗﻢ ﺑﻚ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ WAP ﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮل اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺧﺎدم ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﻮﻳﺔ WAP ﻋﺒﺎرة وﻟﻴﺴﺖ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺧﺎدم ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ WAP ﻋﺒﺎرة وﻟﻴﺴﺖ أو ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤ...

Page 82: ...ﻨﻮان اﻛﺘﺐ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﺬي اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي DNS ﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ IP ﻋﻨﻮان اﻛﺘﺐ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي اﻟﻤﻠﻘﻢ إﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﺬي اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ اﺳﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺬف ﺣﺬف ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﺳﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ذاﻛﺮة ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ ﻫﻨﺎك ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻮاء ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻻ أم اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻻرﺗﺒﺎط ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ إذا ﻣﺎ وﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓ...

Page 83: ...ﺎﺋﻤﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ا اﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺪم أن اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﺰود ﻳﻤﻜﻦ وﺳﻮق اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﺜﻞ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ أﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ اﺷﺘﺮﻛﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ إذا ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ وﻣﺎ اﻷﺳﻬﻢ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ اﺳﻢ ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻬﺬا SIM ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺟﻮد وﺑﻔﻀﻞ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰود اﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻣﻊ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ أن واﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺰود إﻟﻰ ارﺟﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ...

Page 84: ...اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﺘﻢ ًﺎ ﻣ دو اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﻨﺸﺊ أن ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﺆاﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﺗﺼﺎل أي ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻤﺎح ﻋﺪم ًا ﺪ أﺑ Sun ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم اﻟﺘﻲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ Microsystems اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ Netscape ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام Java Applet Java MIDet ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ MS Internet Explorer أو ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ WAP ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺬي اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام Java أﻟﻌﺎب ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ ﺗﻨ...

Page 85: ...ﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻘﻮم أن JAD ﻣﻠﻒ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ J2ME ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت أن اﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻻ ﻗﺪ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ اﻟﻬﻮاﺗﻒ أﻧﻮاع ﺣﺠﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ وﻟﺬا ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮم أو اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ﻣﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪم ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻋﺎدة ﻳﺤﺘﻢ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﺮى اﻟﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد إﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻻ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼت ﻫﺬه ﻣﺜﻞ أ...

Page 86: ...ﺼﻴﺮة اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺻﻮت إرﺳﺎل ﻳﻤﻜﻦ Bluetooth ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ إرﺳﺎل Bluetooth ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ 4 9 اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻓﻬﻮ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻟﻤﺨﺰن ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﺬا أو UMS وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ واﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت واﻷﺻﻮات ﻛﺎﻟﺼﻮر Bluetooth اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة أو ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺑﻀﻐﻂ إرﺳﺎﻟﻪ أو ﺣﺬﻓﻪ أو ً ا ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻛﺎن إذا اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ Bluetooth ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ USB ﻋﺒﺮ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ USB ﻛﺒﻞ ﺧﻼل...

Page 87: ...اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ 3 ً ﺎ أﻳﻀ وﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ذﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ E ﻧﻈﺎم ﻗﺮص ﺣﺮف ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ وﺗﻌﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ وﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت Windows ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎدي ﻣﺠﻠﺪ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ واﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮص ﻓﻮق ً ﺎ ﻣﺰدوﺟ ً ا ﻧﻘﺮ اﻧﻘﺮ 4 ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺠﻠﺪات أرﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ وﺳﺎﺋﻂ My Media ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻧﺴﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ AAC و MP3 ﻫﻲ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪة اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ WAV و ﺻﻮت و MP4 و WMA و AAC و AAC و ﺑﺎﺳ...

Page 88: ...وﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻋﺮض ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ 3GP اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺻﻮر ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ أﻧﻚ ﻣﻦ وﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ اﻟﺼﻮر ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺴﺮدﻫﺎ ﻟﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ أن إﻻ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ إذا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻫﺬا إﻟﻰ ﺷﻲء أي ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪم ﻧﻨﺼﺢ وﻟﻬﺬا ﺮﺟﻰ ُ ﻓﻴ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ إﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺻﻮر ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ اﻟﻘﺮص ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻀﻐ...

Page 89: ...ﻠﻰ ﻨﺔ ّ اﻟﻤﻀﻤ اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ ﺖ ّ ﺛﺒ 1 وﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﻮدم أدوات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ 2 اﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ USB ﻛﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻞ ّ وﺻ 3 اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻞ ّ وﺷﻐ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻨﺼﺢ ُ ﻳ اﻟﻤﻮدم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﻌﺪ 4 اﻟﻤﻮدم أدوات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ وﺟﻮد أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ً ا أﺑﺪ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ً ا ﺿﺮر ﻳﻠﺤﻖ ﻗﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻓﺈن اﻹﻧﺠﺎز ﻗﻴﺪ Windows ﺧﻴﺎرات ﺧﻼل ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ً ﺎ دوﻣ اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺰﻟ...

Page 90: ...ﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺬه ﻣﻦ أي اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮل ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻃﻘﻢ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ راس ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎت اﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ رﻓﺾ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر زر ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن وﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮاس ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت رﺑﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻃﺮف ادﺧﻞ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺮاس ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻻﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ...

Page 91: ...ﺎ داﺋﻤ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ LG ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ أﻋﻼه اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮرة اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﺴﺒﻖ إﻋﻼن دون اﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ﻫﺬه ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ أو اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎت ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎت ...

Page 92: ...91 ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ M6100 اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ اﺳﻢ GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارة درﺟﺔ اﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺟﺎري 55 C أﻗﺼﻰ اﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺟﺎري 45 C 10 C أدﻧﻰ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ...

Page 93: ...92 MEMO ...

Page 94: ... ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ راﻫﻨﻤﺎى دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ M6100 اﻓﺰار ﻧﺮم ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ا ﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﺎت از ﺑﺮﺧ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﺎرﺳ ...

Page 95: ... 21 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ و 3 ﺑﺮﻗﺮار 22 ﺗﻤﺎس G ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 23 ﻣﺘﻦ ﺮدن 4 وارد 27 ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻦ 6 ﺣ در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ 31 ﻣﻨﻮ درﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮدار 33 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ و ﺮدﻫﺎ 3 ﻋﻤﻠ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب 34 ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ 36 ﺗﻤﺎس ﺛﺒﺖ 36 ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس 36 در ﺎﻓﺘ 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ 36 ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ 37 ﺮ 6 اﺧ 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺣﺬف 37 ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﻫﺎ ﻫﺰ ﻨﻪ 38 GPRS اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 39 اﺑﺰار و ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ 39 زﻧﮕﺪار ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 39 Bluetooth 40 ﺣﺴﺎب ﻦ 6 ﻣﺎﺷ 41 واﺣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ 41 ﺟﻬﺎﻧ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 41 ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ 44 ...

Page 96: ... ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار 6 ﻓ ﻦ 6 دورﺑ 65 ﻣﻦ 3 ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ 66 ﻣﻦ 3 و ﺪ ﻮ 69 ﺻﻮت ﺿﺒﻂ 70 ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 71 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت 71 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﺗﺎر ﺦ 71 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 72 ﺗﻤﺎس ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 75 ﺘ 6 اﻣﻨ ﺴﺘﻢ 6 ﺳ 78 ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 78 GPRS ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 79 ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ 4 ﻣﺠﺪد ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 79 ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺖ 6 وﺿﻌ 80 ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت 81 ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ 84 ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺑﻪ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺳﺮو ﺲ 85 در ﺎﻓﺘ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 85 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﻫﺎ 3 ﺑﺎز 87 ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ 87 ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ 88 ﻓﺎ ﻞ 3 ﺳﺎز ﺮه 6 ذﺧ 92 ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم 9...

Page 97: ...00 ﺟ ال اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻃﺮاﺣ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻣﻮرد در ﻣﻬﻤ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 3 ﺣﺎو راﻫﻨﻤﺎ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻦ ا و ﻨﻪ 6 ﺑﻬ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده 3 ﺑﺮا ﺒﺎﺷﺪ 6 ﻣ ﮔﻮﺷ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ آﻣﺪن وارد ﺎ ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از 3 ﺮ 6 ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ را اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ً ﺎ ﻟﻄﻔ ﺮ 4 ذ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ا ﻦ در ﻪ 4 اﺻﻼﺣ ﺎ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪه ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ...

Page 98: ...ازه 3 روﺷﻬﺎ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ SAR ﺰان 6 ﻣ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط آزﻣﺎ ﺸﺎت ﺮد 6 ﮔ در ﻣﺠﺎز ﻗﺪرت ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻦ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻪ 4 درﺣﺎﻟﺘ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد اﺳﺖ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮه درﺣﺎل ﺎﻧﺲ 4 ﻓﺮ 3 ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم 3 ﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ SAR ﺳﻄﻮح ﻦ 6 ﺑ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﻪ 4 ﺣﺎﻟ در ﮔﻮﺷ ا ﻦ ﻪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﻃﺮاﺣ در ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻔﺎوﺗ ﺟ ال ﻣﺘﻨﻮع ﺷﺪه رﻋﺎ ﺖ راد ﻮ اﻣﻮاج ﻣﻌﺮض در ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮار اﺻﻮل ﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻪ 6 ﺗﻮﺻ ICNIRP ﺰه 6 ﻮﻧ ﺮ 6 ﻏ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎت ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ در ﺑﺎﻓﺖ ﮔﺮم ١٠ ده 3 ﺑﺮا ﻠﻮﮔﺮم 64 ﺑﺮ وات ٢...

Page 99: ...ﺘﻔﺎده ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ ﻗﺮار f ﺧﺎ و ﮔﺮد ﺎ دود ﻣﻌﺮض در را ﮔﻮﺷ ﺣﻤﻞ 3 ﻫﺎ ﻂ 6 ﺑﻠ ﺎ 3 اﻋﺘﺒﺎر 3 ﻫﺎ ﺎرت 4 ﻧﺰد در را ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ ﻗﺮار ﻧﻘﻞ و ﺑﮕﺬارد ﺮ 6 ﺗﺄﺛ ﺴ 6 ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃ 3 ﻧﻮارﻫﺎ در ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺎر 4 ا ﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻧﺰﻧ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺰ 6 ﺗ ﺎء 6 اﺷ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ د ﺪن ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺳﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ ﻗﺮار رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻌﺎت ﻣﻌﺮض در را ﮔﻮﺷ ﻣﻮرد ﺎط 6 ﺑﺎاﺣﺘ را ﻫﺪﻓﻮن ﮔﻮﺷ ﺮ 6 ﻧﻈ ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺘﻔﺎده واﻧﺪ ﻤ ﺖ 3 ﺘﺮوﻧ...

Page 100: ...ﺑﺮﺧ 3 رو اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ RF3 اﻧﺮژ ﺰات 6 ﺗﺠﻬ ﺎ ﻞ 6 اﺗﻮﻣﺒ 3 اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻞ 6 اﺗﻮﻣﺒ 6 اﻟ ﺘﺮوﻧ ﮔﺬارد ﺮ 6 ﺗﺎﺛ ا ﻤﻨ از ﺎ 6 اﺷ اﺳﺖ ﻫﻮا ﺴﻪ 64 ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻞ 6 اﺗﻮﻣﺒ اﮔﺮ آن ﻧﺰد در را ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺑ ﻟﻮازم ﻞ 6 ﻗﺒ ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ا ﻨﺼﻮرت ﺮ 6 ﻏ در ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ ﻗﺮار ﺷﻮد ﻣﺮگ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺣﺘ ﺎ 3 ﺟﺪ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ از ﺮد 6 ﮔ ﻣ ﺻﻮرت ﻫﺎ آن در 3 اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺎت 6 ﻋﻤﻠ ﻪ 4 ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘ در ﺪ 6 ﻧ ﻨ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 3 ﺮو 6 ﭘ ﻣﻘﺮرات و ﻦ 6 ﻗﻮا...

Page 101: ... ﺿﺮور 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺑﺮﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻧﻤ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮا ﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺴﺮ 6 ﻣ ﺳﻠﻮﻟ 3 ﻫﺎ اﺗ ﺎ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ 3 ﺿﺮور 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻣﺸﻮرت ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت دﻫﻨﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ و ﺑﺎﻃﺮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺷﻮد ﻪ 6 ﺗﺨﻠ ﺎﻣﻞ 4 ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ ﺷﺎرژ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻧ ﻻزم 3 ا ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ اﺛﺮ ﭻ 6 ﻫ 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺴﺘﻢ 6 ﺳ د ﮕﺮ ﺧﻼف ﺑﺮ ﮔﺬارد ﺮ 6 ﺗﺄﺛ 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ﺑﺮ ﻪ 4 ﻧﺪارد وﺟﻮد ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺟ ال 3 ﺷﺎر...

Page 102: ...ﺮ از ﻗﺒﻞ را آن ﻧﺸﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻃﻮﻻﻧ ﻣﺪت ﺑﻪ 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﺷﺎرژ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺎ و ﺪ 6 ﺧﻮرﺷ ﻧﻮر ﻢ 6 ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻣﻌﺮض در را 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ ﺷﺎرژر ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ ﻗﺮار ﺣﻤﺎم ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎ ﻂ 6 ﻣﺤ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﻪ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮم ﺎ و ﺳﺮد 3 ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ در را 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد ﻣﻨﻔ 3 ﺮ 6 ﺗﺎﺛ 3 ﺑﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد 3 رو اﺳﺖ ﺑﻬ ﻨﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و ا ﻤﻨ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ...

Page 103: ...ﻨﺘﺮل 4 را ﮔﻮﺷﻰ ﺻﺪاى ﺰان 6 ﻣ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻃﻰ در ﺟﻠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ i راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﻧﻤﺎى ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓ ﺶ k ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وﺻﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ا ﻦ ﺑﻪ را ﻫﺪﺳﺖ MP3 دورﺑ ﻦ ﻠ ﺪ m ﺷﻮد آﺷ ﺎر ﻦ 6 دورﺑ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺑﺎز را ﺸﻮ 4 ﺷﻮ ﺪ وارد ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻢ 6 ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ا ﻨ ﻪ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻮﺗﺎﻫ 4 ﻣﺪت را ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ا ﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧ ﻣﺪت 3 ﺑﺮا را ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ا ﻦ MP٣ ﺮدن 4 ﻓﻌﺎل 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر 1 2 3 4 k m i f و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎ M6100 ...

Page 104: ...ى روى ﻟﻮدﮔﻰ آ ﮔﺬارد ﺮ 6 ﺗﺄﺛ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﻓﻼش i ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻫﺎى ﺳﻮراخ k ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﮔ ﺮه m ﺷﻮد ﺟﺪا 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ درﭘﻮش ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻤﻪ 4 د ا ﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ r ﺎرت ﺳ ﻢ ﺖ ﺳﻮ t ﺎرت ﺳ ﻢ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺎ ﺎﻧﻪ u ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺎ ﺎﻧﻪ v ﺎﺑﻞ راﺑﻂ ﺷﺎرژر راﺑﻂ x 3 1 2 4 6 5 7 8 9 f i k m r t u v x و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎ M6100 ...

Page 105: ...ﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ا ﻦ دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ دﻫﺪ ورودى ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎى آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣﻰ ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﺪ 6 ﺎﺑ دﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻰ و ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ اﻋﺪاد و ﺣﺮوف ﻠ ﺪﻫﺎى m ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣﻰ وارد را ﺧﺎص ﻫﺎى ﺘﺮ 4 ﺎرا 4 ﺑﺮﺧﻰ و ﺣﺮوف اﻋﺪاد 6 8 7 10 11 1 2 12 9 3 4 5 ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺸﺪن ﺪه 6 ﺷﻨ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺸ ﻼﺗ ﺑﺮوز از 3 ﺮ 6 ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺑﻪ را ﺸﻮ 4 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺎر 4 ﻦ 6 ﺣ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺮف ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﺪا ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺑﺎز t f i k m r u x f ff fi v و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎ M6100 ...

Page 106: ...و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎى ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و روﺷﻦ ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﻠ ﺪ f ﺑﺮاى ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ و ﺗﻤﺎس ﺮدن 4 رد ﺎ دادن ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ا ﻦ از ﺎر 4 ﺑﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎ را ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ا ﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺮدن 4 روﺷﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺮاى ﺷﻮد ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺪ ﺮدن ﭘﺎ ﻠ ﺪ ff f ﭘﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣﻰ f ﭘﺎ را ﺘﺮ 4 ﺎرا 4 G ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺪ ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎ را ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ورودى ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺮدن 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ا ﻦ از ﺰ 6 ﻧ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﺧﺎص ﺮد 3 ﻋﻤﻠ ﻠ...

Page 107: ... وﺿﻌ ﺗﻮﺿ ﺤﺎت ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮى ﻧﻤﺎد دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺎم 6 ﭘ در ﺎﻓﺖ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﺎم 6 ﭘ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻟﺮزﺷ زﻧﮓ ﻪ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻪ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺳﺖ ﺖ 4 ﺳﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻪ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل M6100 و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺖ 6 ﻔ 64 از ﻤﺘﺮ 4 ﮕﻨﺎل 6 ﺳ ﻗﺪرت ﻪ 4 زﻣﺎﻧ ﺎﺑﺪ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪا ﻗﻄﻌ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺧﻂ ٢ ﺷﺒ ﻪ 3 ﺧﻄﻬﺎ ﺷﻮ ﺪ ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﺻﺪا ﺑﺪ ﺖ 6 ﻔ 64 ﺎ و ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﺑﮕ ﻧﻈﺮ ...

Page 108: ...ﺎﺑﻰ 6 دﺳﺘ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده درﺣﺎل ﺷﻤﺎ ﻪ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن ﺪ 6 ﻫﺴﺘ GPRS از زﻣﺎﻧ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رو ﺪاد ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻓﻌﺎل Bluetooth ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻒ 6 ﺿﻌ آﻧﺮا ﺗﻮان 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺖ 6 وﺿﻌ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻪ 4 زﻣﺎﻧ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺎ ﻦ 6 دورﺑ 3 ﺘﻬﺎ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ از ﻧﺒﺎ ﺪ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ اﻋﻼم ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺖ 6 وﺿﻌ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﮕﺎم در اﺳﺖ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ و ﮋﮔ ﻬﺎ M6100 ...

Page 109: ...ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ را ﺎرت 4 و ﺷﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ درﺳﺖ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﻪ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎ ﻃﺮف ﺑﻪ ﺎرت 4 روى رﻧﮓ ﻃﻼ ﻰ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎ ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ را آن ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺑ ﺸ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺟﻬﺖ در و داده ﺘﻪ 3 ﻧ اﺳﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻪ 4 ﺣﺎﻟﻰ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﺮدن 4 ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺮد 4 ﺎر 4 در ﻧﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ اﺣﺘ ﺎط آﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﻓﻠﺰى ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﻄﺢ ﺎر 6 ﺑﺴ ﻧﻘﻞ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻨﺪ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺐ 6 آﺳ ﺪﮔﻰ 6 ﺧﺮاﺷ ﺑﺎ ...

Page 110: ...ﻒ ﺷﺎرژ اﺗﻤﺎم از ﭘﺲ 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎد f ﻣﺘﺤﺮ 3 ﻫﺎ ﻠﻪ 6 ﻣ ٢ ﺷﻮد ﻣ 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﺎد f ﻣﺘﺤﺮ ﻧﻮار ﺷﺪ ﺎﻣﻞ 4 ﺷﺎرژ ا ﻨ ﻪ از ﺑﻌﺪ ٣ ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ اﺣﺘ ﺎط ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ز ﺮا ﺪ 6 ﻧ ﻨ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را راﺑﻂ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮق آداﭘﺘﻮر ﺎ و ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺮاﺑﻰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺧﻮد ﺸﻮر 4 از ﺧﺎرج در 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺷﺎرژر از ﮔﺮ ا 3 ﺑﻨﺪ ﺐ 64 ﺗﺮ 3 ﺑﺮا دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل از ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺎور ﺪ 6 ﻧ ﺮون 6 ﺑ را ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﺮدن 4 ﺷﺎرژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮوع...

Page 111: ...ﮕ ﺑﺮق ﺧﻄﺮ ﻮاﻧﺎت 6 ﺣ دﻧﺪان ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺰ 6 ﺗ f ﻧﻮ ﺎء 6 اﺷ ﻪ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺑﺎﺷ ﻣﻮاﻇﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ز ﺮا ﻧ ﻨﺪ ﺪا 6 ﭘ ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺷﻮد 3 ﺳﻮز آﺗﺶ ﺟﻮاب ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺎ ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻧﮕ ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺑﺎﺗﺮ ﺷﺎرژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﻮﺗﺎه 4 ﻣﺪار ا ﺠﺎد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ز ﺮا ﺪ 6 ﻧﺪﻫ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﺒﺎل را 3 ﺳﻮز آﺗﺶ ﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕ ﺑﺮق ﺧﻄﺮ و ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﺘﻪ 3 ﻧ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻨﺎن 6 اﻃﻤ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻦ 6 اوﻟ از ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺷﺎرژ ً ﻼ ﺎﻣ 4 ﺑﺎﺗﺮى ﻪ 4 ﺎور ﺪ 6 ﻧ...

Page 112: ...ﻮد ﺧﺎﻣﻮش LCD دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺪﻫﺎ 3 ﺪﻫﺎ 4 از ﻣﺠﺎز ﺮ 6 ﻏ اﻓﺮاد دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ 3 ﺪﻫﺎ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺪﻫﺎ 4 ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ PUK2 و PUK از ﺮ 6 ﻏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ª ٧ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ رﻗﻤ v ﺗﺎ m PIN ﺪ ﻫﻮ ﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺎ Personal Identification Number PIN ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺮ 6 ﻏ را ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﻣﺠﺎز ﺮ 6 ﻏ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺨﺼ ﺒﺎﻧ 6 ﭘﺸﺘ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ PIN ﺪ 4 ﺴﺎزد 6 ﻣ ﺷﺪه ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ا ﻦ ﻪ 6 زﻣﺎﻧ ﮕﺮد...

Page 113: ...PUKi ﺪ ﺒﺎﻧ 6 ﭘﺸﺘ ﺎرﺗﻬﺎ 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺑﺮﺧ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻪ 4 PUK2 ﺪ 4 در اﺳﺖ ﺎز 6 ﻧ ﻣﻮرد PUK2 ﺪ 4 دادن ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮕﺮدﻧﺪ 6 ﻣ ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﺑﮕ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﺻﻮرت رﻗﻤ v ﺗﺎ m اﻣﻨ ﺘ ﺪ 3 ﺮ 6 ﺟﻠﻮﮔ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از را د ﮕﺮ اﻓﺮاد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺘ 6 اﻣﻨ ﺪ 4 ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ روش ﺷﺪه ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺶ 6 ﭘ از ﺘ 6 اﻣﻨ ﺪ 4 ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ 3 ورود ﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺮدن 4 f ﭘﺎ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺘ 6 اﻣﻨ ﺪ 4 ﺒﺎﺷﺪ 6 ﻣ اﺳﺖ ﺎز 6 ﻧ ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺠﺪد ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل 3 ﺑﺮا و ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل...

Page 114: ... ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ از ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮار آﺧﺮ ﻦ و ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را S ﻤﻪ 4 د ﺑ ﺎر آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در ١ ﻧﺸﺪه داده ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺎ و ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﮕﺮدد 6 ﻣ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻬﺘﺪار 3 ﻫﺎ ﻤﻪ 4 د از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ را ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻤﺎره ٢ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎﺋ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را S ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ 3 ﺑﺮا ٣ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﺑ ﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻦ 6 ﺑ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺎ دار ﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ و ﻓﺸﺮده را 0 ﻤﻪ 4 د ١ 3 ﺪﻫﺎ 4 ﺎر 4 ﺧﻮد ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺮدد ﻇﺎﻫﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﻦ 6 ﺑ...

Page 115: ...ن 4 ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎﺋ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 3 رو ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻼش و ﺰﻧﺪ 6 ﻣ زﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس G در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎن ز ﺮﻧﺪه 6 ﮔ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻪ 4 ﺻﻮرﺗ در ﺸﻮد 6 ﻣ روﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻧﺎم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ در ﻗﺒﻞ از از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ا ﻦ ﮕﺮدد 6 ﻣ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 3 رو 3 و ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ ﺒﺎﻧ 6 ﭘﺸﺘ 3 ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ 3 د 3 آ ﺎﻟﺮ 4 ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺑﺎز را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 3 ﺑﺮا ١ دادن ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺮدن 4 ﺑﺎز ﻪ 4 ﻫﻨﮕﺎ...

Page 116: ...ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ روس ﺮ 6 ﻣﺘﻐ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ 6 ﻣ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎن داﺧﻞ در ﺑﺨﺼﻮص آﻧﺘﻦ ﮕﻨﺎل 6 ﺳ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ 6 ﻣ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺖ 4 ﺣﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﻮد آﻧﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺮدن وارد وارد را اﻋﺪاد و اﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ در اﺳﺎﻣ ﺮدن 4 ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﻣﺜﺎل 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ا ﺠﺎد ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ در ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﻣﺜﺎل ﺷﺨﺼ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ اﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ز ﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ورود 3 روﺷﻬﺎ Tx ﺣﺎﻟﺖ G ﺣﺮوف ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﺑﺪون ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ G ...

Page 117: ... را ﻣﺘﻦ 3 ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ٢ روش ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ LCD ﺻﻔﺤﻪ راﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ در ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺑﺮرﺳ را ﻣﺘﻦ ورود ﻓﻌﻠ Tx ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻤﺘﺮ ﻦ 4 ﺑﺎ ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ G ﻤ 4 ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ T9 ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺎﺑ دﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻠﻤﻪ 4 ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ ﺗﺼﻮر ﻪ 4 را 3 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺮوف ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺎر 4 ﺧﻮد ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺗﺎ ﭗ را آن ﺪ 6 ﺨﻮاﻫ 6 ﻣ ﺻﻮرت ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ G ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺎر 4 ا ﻦ ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑ...

Page 118: ...ﺋ ﺟﻬﺘﺪار ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻧﺪارد وﺟﻮد اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ در ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﻟﻐﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ABC ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ را آن ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را T٩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زﺑﺎن ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ 3 زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ T٩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب T٩ را ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد زﺑﺎن ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را T٩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ Tx off اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻗﺮار ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در را ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ را ﻠﻤﻪ 4 اﺑﺘﺪا ﺣﺮﻓ ﻫﺮ ﺮدن 4 f ﭘﺎ ﺎ اﺻﻼح از ﻗﺒﻞ ٢ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد ...

Page 119: ... ﺑﻪ و ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺒﺎر را 0 ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دادن ﻗﺮار 3 ﺑﺮا ٢ را C ﻤﻪ 4 د ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را C ﻤﻪ 4 د ﺣﺮوف ﺣﺬف 3 ﺑﺮا ﺷﻮد f ﭘﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻞ 4 ﺗﺎ دار ﺪ ﻧﮕﻪ و ﻓﺸﺮده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻔﺖ 6 ﺷ 1 1 2 ث ت پ ب 2 3 ء ئ إ ؤ أ آ ا 3 4 ض ص ش س 4 5 ژ ز ر ذ د 5 6 خ ح چ ج 6 7 3 و ه ن 7 8 م ل گ f ق 8 9 ف غ ع ظ ط 9 0 ﺟﺪول 0 ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻤﻪ 4 د از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و ﺣﺮوف ﻣﻮرد در ﺸﺘﺮ 6 ﺑ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ رﺟﻮع ذ ﻞ ﺟﺪول ﺑﻪ اﻟﻔﺒﺎ 3 ﻫﺎ ﻋ...

Page 120: ...ه زﻣﺎن در ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻃﻮل اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺸﺮ ﺢ ذ ﻞ در آﻧﺎن 3 اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻮ ﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﻗﺮار از را ﺧﻮد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺛﺎﻧﻮ ﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ا ﺠﺎد ﺟﻬﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺧﻮد ﮔﻮﺷ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ داده ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ داﺧﻞ در ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺮدن 4 ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﭙﺲ و داده ﻓﺸﺎر را راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻦ 6 ﺣ در ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﺮدن اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس دو ﺑ ﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ و رﻓ...

Page 121: ... ﺳﺎدﮔ ﺑﻪ ا ﻨ ﺎر 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را 3 ورود ﺗﻤﺎس ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻦ 6 ﺣ در E دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺎ و رد ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﻣﻨﻮ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 رد ﺮوﻓﻮن 3 ﻣ ﺮدن ﻗﻄﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﭙﺲ و ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻃﻮل در را ﺮوﻓﻮن 6 ﻣ 3 ﺻﺪا روﺷﻦ ﺻﺪا ﻗﻄﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺻﺪا ﻗﻄﻊ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﺘﻮاﻧﺪ 6 ﻣ ﮔﻮﺷ ﮔﺮدد ﺧﺎرج ﺮوﻓﻮن 6 ﻣ 3 ﺻﺪا ﺗﻤﺎس ﻃﻮل در DTMF ا ﺠﺎد ﺳﭙﺲ و ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻣﻨ...

Page 122: ... 6 ﻣ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار دوم ﺗﻤﺎس ﻪ 6 زﻣﺎﻧ ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺮد 6 ﮕ 6 ﻣ ﻗﺮار اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻌﻮ ﺾ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﭙﺲ و ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻠﻪ 6 وﺳ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ و رﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس دو ﻦ 6 ﺑ ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻪ 6 درﺣﺎﻟ و داده ﻗﺮار اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در را ﺗﻤﺎس G ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ و ﺮده 4 ﻓﻌﺎل را ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻓﻌﺎل ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﮔﺮوﻫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﮔﺮوﻫ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ 3 ﻣ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس دادن ﻗﺮار ﺎﻟﻤﻪ 3 ﻣ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ و داده ﻓﺸﺎر...

Page 123: ...ﻗﻄﻊ E ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ داده ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ 4 ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﻨﺪﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮ ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﮔﺮوﻫ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ 3 ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ 3 ﻣ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻤﻪ 4 د دادن ﻓﺸﺎر از ﭘﺲ ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ ﭘﺎ ﺎن را ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻤﺎس ﻞ ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﮔﺮوﻫ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ ﺑﻪ دادن ﭘﺎ ﺎن ﻣ داده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻨﻮن 4 ا ﻪ 4 ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ 4 ﺮﻧﺪه 6 ﮔ ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺑﺮا ﺷﻮد ﻗﻄﻊ E ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣ ﺷﻮد ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻨﻔﺮاﻧﺲ 4 ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ از ﭘﺲ ﺪ 6 ﻨ ...

Page 124: ...ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺣﺬف ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﻫﺎ ﻫﺰ ﻨﻪ È GPRS اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ª اﺑﺰار و ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣ k دار زﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ١ Bluetooth ٢ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻦ 6 ﻣﺎﺷ ٣ واﺣﺪ ﺗﺒﺪ ﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﻧ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ È ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ª ﻣﻮدم ٧ ر ﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ m ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ١ ر ﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ٢ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ٣ ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻫﺎ ﭘ ﻐﺎم r ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ١ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪوق ٢ ﺧﺮوﺟ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ٣ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮ ﺲ ﺶ 6 ﭘ ﺻﻮﺗ ﭘﺴﺖ در ﺎﻓﺖ È اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ª اﻟﮕﻮ ٧ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ٨ ﻣﻨﻮ درﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮدار ...

Page 125: ...ﻣﺪ ﺎﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﻣﻮﻟﺘ u ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﺗﺎر ﺦ ١ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ٢ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ٣ ﺘ 6 اﻣﻨ ﺴﺘﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ È ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ª ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ 4 ﻣﺠﺪد ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ٧ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺖ 6 وﺿﻌ ٨ ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت 8 ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ١ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ٢ در ﺎﻓﺘ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت x ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﻫﺎ 3 ﺑﺎز ١ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ٢ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ٣ ﻓﺎ ﻞ 3 ﺳﺎز ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﻣﻨﻮ درﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮدار ﻣﻨﻮ درﺧﺘﻰ ﻧﻤﻮدار ...

Page 126: ...ﻠ 4 ﻣﻰ را اﻣ ﺎن ا ﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى و ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻰ و ﺮده 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺧﺎص ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎى ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻪ 4 دﻫﻨﺪ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪﻫﺎى 6 ﻠ 4 ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻻى ً ﺎ ﻘ 6 دﻗ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎ ﺎﻧﻰ ﺧﻂ ى ﺟﻤﻠﻪ اﺳﺖ دﻫﺪ ﻣﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺑﺰﻧ را ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 آن 3 ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ و ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺎﺑ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺰﻧ را راﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺎﺑ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘ...

Page 127: ... ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺪ 6 ﺗﺄ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺮدن 4 ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﭙﺲ ٣ i f ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ از ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮو ﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ در ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻪ اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻ ﺪ 6 ﺗﺄ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﭼﭗ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺑﺎز ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺮدن 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ دﻟﺨﻮاه ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻪ را ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را 3 ورود ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻮع ورود زﻧﮓ ﻧﻮع ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ از را ﺧﻮد دﻟﺨﻮاه زﻧﮓ زﻧﮓ ﺻﺪا ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ را زﻧﮓ 3 ﺻﺪا ﺰ...

Page 128: ... 4 ﺧﻮد ﺟﻮاﺑﮕﻮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻏ ﺮ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﺨﻮد ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ È از ﭘﺲ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ r از ﭘﺲ داد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﺨﻮد ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ ١٠ از ﭘﺲ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ f از ﭘﺲ داد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ k f ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐ ﺮ را دﻟﺨﻮاﻫ ﻧﺎم ﻫﺮ و داده ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را ﭘﺮوﻓﺎ ﻞ G ﻧﺎم ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ آن 3 ﺑﺮا ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ در ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻧﺎم ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ 3 ﺑﺮا ١ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر از ﭘﺲ و رﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻧﺎم ﺮ 6 ﺗﻐ ﺪ 6 ﺗﺄ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗ...

Page 129: ...ﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺮه 6 ذﺧ آدرس دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺪ 6 ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺷﻤﺎره ا ﻦ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺬف ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ از را ﺗﻤﺎس ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ i i ﻣﻨﻮ در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺮ 6 اﺧ 3 ورود ﺷﻤﺎره ١٠ ﻪ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ا ﻦ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺗﻤﺎس آن ﺑﻪ و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺷﻤﺎره وﺟﻮد ﺻﻮرت در ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺮه 6 ذﺧ آدرس دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ در را آن ﺎ ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﺑﮕ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ در را دو ﻫﺮ و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد ﺷﻤﺎره 3 ﺑﺮا را 3 ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻧﺎم ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺮ...

Page 130: ... 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻣﺠﺪدا را ﺗﻤﺎس زﻣﺎن ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ز ﺮ 3 ﺳﻨﺠﻬﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺗﻤﺎس آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﻣﺪت ﺗﻤﺎس آﺧﺮ ﻦ از 3 ورود و ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺪت ﻞ 4 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺳﻨﺞ زﻣﺎن ﻣﺠﺪد ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ آﺧﺮ ﻦ زﻣﺎن 3 ورود 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺪت در ﺎﻓﺘ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺧﺮوﺟ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﺪت ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺪت ﻪ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 f ﭘﺎ i r...

Page 131: ...ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ را اﻋﺘﺒﺎرﺗﺎن ﺰان 6 ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺪ 6 دﻫ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ا ﻦ ﺎر ﺧﻮد ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺑﺨﻮد ﺧﻮد ﺑﻄﻮر را ﺗﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ آﺧﺮ ﻦ 3 ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺧﺘﻢ از ﭘﺲ را ﺑﻬﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻦ ﺷﻮد اﻧﺘﺨﺎب روﺷﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ t i ﻣﻨﻮ GPRS اﻃﻼﻋﺎت GPRS ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ﺷﺒ ﻪ از ﺷﺪه داده اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﺎن ﻣﺪت ﺰ 6 ﻧ و دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ را آس آر ﭘ ﺟ ﮔﺮدد ﻣ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺒ ﻪ f t i ﻣﻨﻮ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ 3 ...

Page 132: ...ﺮاﻫﻢ ﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎ 6 ﺎﻣﭙ 4 و ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ Bluetooth اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﮔﻮﺷ ا ﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺪ ﮕﺮ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻬﺎ 6 ﮔﻮﺷ د ﮕﺮ و آن ﻦ 6 ﺑ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﻪ 4 اﺳﺖ داﺧﻠ ﺳﺎزد ﻣ ﻣﻤ ﻦ را ﺮه 6 ﻏ و 3 ﻮﺗﺮ 6 ﺎﻣﭙ 4 در ﺎﻓﺖ د ﮕﺮ Bluetooth ﻠﻪ 6 وﺳ G از ﻫﺎ داده ﻪ 4 ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﺗﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﭙ 4 ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺗﺒﺎدل ﺪ 6 ﺗﺎ ª È ٢ ﻣﻨﻮ MP3 ﭘﻮﺷﻪ MP3 6 4 ﻣﻨﻮ و ﺪ ﻮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ 3GP و ﺪ ﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ VCF ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ 3 ﺗﻤ...

Page 133: ...k k ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﺎﺷ ﻦ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺒﺎﺷﺪ 6 ﻣ اﺻﻠ ﻋﻤﻞ 3 دارا ﺣﺴﺎب ﻦ 6 ﻣﺎﺷ ا ﻦ ﺗﻘﺴ ﻢ ﺿﺮب ﺗﻔﺮ ﻖ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻦ 6 ﻣﺎﺷ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ 3 ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮدﻫﺎ از ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺑﻌﻼوه ا ﻨﭻ ﻟﮕﺎر ﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﻧﮋاﻧﺖ ﻨﻮس 6 ﺴ 4 ﻨﻮس 6 ﺳ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﻮان ﺟﺬز ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد اﻋﺪاد ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻃﺮ ﻖ از را اﻋﺪاد ١ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب 3 ﺑﺮا را ﻤﺎ ﺶ 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ٢ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد را اﻋﺪاد ﺳﭙﺲ ٣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ را ﺠﻪ 6 ﻧﺘ ﺠﻪ 6 ﻧﺘ O ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را ﻣﺠﺪد ﻢ 6 ﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ 4 ...

Page 134: ...ا ﺟﻬﺎن ﻋﻤﺪه 3 ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎ 3 ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﺎص زﻣﺎﻧ ﻣ ﺎن G ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﻪ 4 ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ١ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ L و R ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ را ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ را زﻣﺎن ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻤﻪ ﻣ 4 د ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ ٢ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﻧﻈﺮ t k ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔ ﺮ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻄ 6 ﻣﺤ ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ را ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 f t k ﻣﻨﻮ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻋﻤﻮﻣ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در را ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺘﻪ 3 ﻧ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺮدن 4 f ﭘﺎ 3 ﺑﺮا C ﺪ...

Page 135: ...ﻨﻤﺎ 3 ﺻﺪا ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﺻﺪا ﺮدن ﺿﺒﻂ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب 3 ﻣﻨﻮ از ﻪ 4 را راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﺪ ﺪ 3 ﺻﺪا ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺿﺒﻂ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ ١È ﻣﺪت ﺑﻪ ا ﺪ ﺮده 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺎرﺑﺮ 4 t t k ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪه ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘ ﻐﺎم زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻪ 4 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ از ﺴﺘ 6 ﻟ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 3 اﻧﺘﻬﺎ در اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﺸﺎن اﺳﺖ آن ﻨﻨﺪه 4 ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎم و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﭘﺨﺶ را ﺷﺪه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ f ﭘﺎ را ﺷﺪه ﺪه 6 ﺷﻨ ﺎم 6 ﭘ 3 ﺻﺪا ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺮدن ﺣﺬف ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻪ 4 3 ا ﺮﻧﺪه 6 ﮔ ﺗﻤﺎ...

Page 136: ...6 ﮔ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ ﭘﻨﺞ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ درﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ ده از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺛﺎﻧ ﻪ ازده ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺮ 6 ﮔ u k ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻮدم ﺷﺒ ﻪ 3 ﺳﺮو ﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮدم ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ PCSync از ﺪ 6 ﺧﻮاﻫ ﻣ اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺎﺷ داﺷﺘﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده Internet Cube Contents banks را USB ﺎﺑﻞ 4 ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﺎز ﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل را ﻣﻮدم و رﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وﺻﻞ ...

Page 137: ... ﺪ 6 ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ارﺳﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ داده ﺘﻮان 6 ﻣ Bluetooth ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ارﺳﺎل ﺳﺎزﮔﺎر آن ﺑﺎ ﻪ 4 دﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ Bluetooth ﻃﺮ ﻖ از را ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎد ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻢ 6 ﺳ در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻨ ﺪ ﭙ ﺪ 6 دﻫ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮﻋ ﺲ ﺎ و ﮔﻮﺷ ﺑﻪ را ﺎرت 4 آن از ﺸﺘﺮ 6 ﺑ ﻪ 4 را 3 ا ﺷﻤﺎره ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ اﺻﻠ ﺷﻤﺎره اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﺰل ﺎ دﻓﺘﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﻣ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده داده ﻧﺸﺎن ﻧﺨﺴﺖ اﺻﻠ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻓﻌﺎل آﻧﺮا اول ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ زﻣﺎن آن ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ از ﭘﺲ ﺷﺪ ﺧ...

Page 138: ... 6 ﺑﻨﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺒﺎ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻣ ﺷﻮد وارد را ﻧﺎم ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺮدن 4 ﻗﺒﻮل a را ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻤﺎره ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺮدن 4 ﻗﺒﻮل b ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ وارد ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺮه 6 ذﺧ c را ﺧﻮد ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﮔﺮوه ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ L R ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ d ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋ ﺲ G ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ L R D U ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ e ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب k f m ﻣﻨﻮ ﮔ ﺮﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﮔﺮوه ﻞ 4 در و ﺪ 6 ﺑﺎﺷ داﺷﺘﻪ ﻋﻀﻮ ٢٠ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﮔﺮوه ﻫﺮ در ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺗﻌﺮ ﻒ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺰ 6 ﻧ ﮔﺮوه ٧ ا ...

Page 139: ... 6 ﺨﻮاﻫ 6 ﻣ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ٣ ﺑﭙﺮداز ﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ در ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺮده 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﺳﺮ ﻊ 3 ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻌﻨﻮان را ﺷﻤﺎره ا ﻨ ﻪ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺬف ﺎ داده ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را 3 ورود ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻧﻤﻮد ﺪ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺎ و ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻤﺎره ا ﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ارﺳﺎل ﺎم 6 ﭘ آن r f m ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﺳﺎﻣ ١ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺪﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺑﻪ ٢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺮدن 4 ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ...

Page 140: ...ﺲ ﺪ 6 ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﭙ 4 دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺳﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺑﺎز را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ ﻓﺸﺮدن اﺳﺎﻣ ﺑﺎ ١ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ورود ﺟﻬﺖ و ﻣﻮارد ﺗﻤﺎم ﭙ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ٢ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻢ 6 ﺳ از را ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺎرت ﺳ ﻢ از ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮔﻮﺷ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺎرت 4 ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ از را ﻫﺎ 3 ورود ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺎرت ﺳ ﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﭙ 4 ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ 3 رو ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ را ز ﺮ 3 ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ٣ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ﭙ 4 زﻣﺎن در اﺻﻠ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎ ﺸﻮد 6 ﻣ 3...

Page 141: ...ﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ ﻤﻪ اﺳﺎﻣ 4 د ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ ١ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺮو ﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻪ ٢ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺪﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺧﺪﻣﺎت 3 ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎ ٣ D U3 ﻫﺎ ﻤﻪ 4 د ﺳﺮو ﺲ G اﻧﺘﺨﺎب 3 ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎدن S ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ وﺿﻌ ﺖ در 3 ﻫﺎ 3 ورود ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ا ﻦ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ ﻣ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ در آزاد ﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺣﺎل ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺑﺎز ﻓﺸﺮدن اﺳﺎﻣ ﺑﺎ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ دﻓﺘﺮ ١ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎ...

Page 142: ...زﻧﮓ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺎﺷ ﺮده 4 ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺎدداﺷﺖ G ﻪ 6 ﺻﻮرﺗ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ زد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺮح ﻠ ﺪ ﺎﻧﻪ 6 ﺳﺎﻟ 1 3 ﺎﻧﻪ 6 ﻣﺎﻫ ﻫﻔﺘﮕ D U روزاﻧﻪ L R را ﻫﺎ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ر ﺰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر ز ﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ f i m ﻣﻨﻮ ﺟﺪ ﺪ اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ روز G 3 ﺑﺮا ﺟﺪ ﺪ 3 ا ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻓﺰودن اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣ را ﺪ 6 ﭼﭗ ﺗﺄ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺳﭙﺲ و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد را ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را i i m ﻣﻨﻮ روزاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻞ 4 ﻪ 4 ﺪ 6 دﻫ ارﺟﺎع ﻣﺸﺮوح ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ...

Page 143: ...ﭗ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ ١ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﻮدن ﺧﺎﻟ ﺻﻮرت در ٢ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﭼﭗ اﻓﺰودن ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺳﭙﺲ و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد را ﺎدداﺷﺖ ٣ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺪ 6 ﺗﺄ m m ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻦ 6 ﺑ از را اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻘﻮ ﻢ ﻧﻮع ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ در ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻤﺴ و 3 ﻗﻤﺮ 3 ﻼد 6 ﻣ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺘﻪ 3 ﻧ را ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را ﻣﺘﻦ 3 ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺧﻮاﻫ ﻣ ﮔﺮ ا ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸ...

Page 144: ...ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻧﻤﻰ را د ﮕﺮى ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﭻ 6 ﻫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﻣﻨﻮى در را ﺣﺬف ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻤﻰ ﻫﺎى ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺣﺬف ﺑﺮاى وﺟﻮد ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﻓﻀﺎ ﻰ ﻪ 6 وﻗﺘ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﺪه در ﺎﻓﺖ SMS ﻫﺎى ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺎﻓﻰ 4 ﻓﻀﺎى ا ﻨ ﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺸﺮوط ﺷﻮﻧﺪ وارد ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻰ ﺎت 6 ﺟﺰﺋ از اﻃﻼع ﺑﺮاى ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد را ﺧﻮد ﺎم 6 ﭘ ١ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺮدن 4 وارد ٧٢ ﺗﺎ ٣٢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺮدن 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ...

Page 145: ...ﺮا را زﺑﺎن Tx زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ T٩ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ را T٩ 3 ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻓﻌﺎل ﺮ 6 ﻏ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺎم 6 ﭘ G ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻦ 6 ﺣ در را ا ﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺧﺮوج ﺎم 6 ﭘ ً ﺎ ﺿﻤﻨ ﺷﺪ ﺪ 6 ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺑﺎزﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﺷﺪه ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣﻰ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﻰ وارد را ﻣﺘﻦ ﻪ 6 ﺣﺎﻟ در ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ٣ را ﻫﺎ ﻰ ﻤﻪ 6 ﺿﻤ 3 ﺟﺎﮔﺬار راﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ارﺳﺎل ﺧﻮد ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻣﻌﺮوف ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ﺣﺎوى...

Page 146: ...ﭘ ١ را ﺷ ﻠ ﻬﺎ و اﻋﺪاد ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ راﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ورود از ﭘﺲ ﺮد 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده T9 ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ از ﺑﺎ ﺮد 4 وارد ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺪ 6 ﺗﺎ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﻣﺘﻨ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ را 3 ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺎ ﺻﺪا ٢ ﺑﺮو ﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻦ 6 ﭘﺎ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻤﺎ ﺶ 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺳﻤﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 و ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ٣ را ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺿﺎﻓﻪ اﺳﻼ ﺪ G ﭼﭗ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ از را اﺳﻼ ﺪ اﻓﺰودن...

Page 147: ...ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪه ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ T٩ABC T٩Abc T٩abc ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را T٩ ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ زﺑﺎن Tx زﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ T٩ 3 ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش T٩ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺮﻓﻌﺎل 6 ﻏ را ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺎم 6 ﭘ G ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻦ 6 ﺣ در را ا ﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺧﺮوج ﺎم 6 ﭘ ً ﺎ ﺿﻤﻨ ﺷﺪ ﺪ 6 ﺧﻮاﻫ ﺑﺎزﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﺷﺪه ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را 3 ﺟﺎﮔﺬار راﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 È ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻋ ﺲ G ﺎ ﺮده 4 3 ﺟﺎﮔﺬار ﻋ ﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ G 3 ﺟﺪ ﺪ 3 ﺻﺪا ﺎ ...

Page 148: ...ﮔﺮ ﺣﺬف 3 ورود ﺻﻨﺪوق از را ﻢ 6 ﺳ 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﻮد داده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻧ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ 3 ﺑﺮا ﻓﻀﺎ ﻋﺒﺎرت اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺮدن 4 آزاد 3 ﺑﺮا را ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺎ ﻫﺎ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺷﻮد ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺬف ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺎم 6 ﭘ G در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎﺑﺖ اﻃﻼﻋ ﻪ 4 ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ﺻﺒﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ آﻧﺮا ﺪ 6 ﺑﺘﻮاﻧ ا ﻨ ﻪ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺷﺪ داده ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮد داﻧﻠﻮد ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دادن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎ را ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ از ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﺟﻬﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﭼﭗ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﻤﺖ ...

Page 149: ...ه ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣﻤ ﻦ را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ 3 ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻣﺠﺪد ا ﺠﺎد ﺮار 3 ﺗ ﺳﺎزد ﻣ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺑﺮﺧﻼف ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺎم 6 ﭘ اﻋﻼن 3 ﺑﺮا ﻓﻘﻂ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺎ ﺎر 4 ﺧﻮد ﺑﻄﻮر ﻢ 6 ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﺑﺎ ﺪ 3 ا ﭼﻨﺪرﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻣﺘﻨ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺎم 6 ﭘ اﻋﻼن اﺑﺘﺪا ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺷﻮد داﻧﻠﻮد ﺳﺮور از دﺳﺘ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺎر 4 ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎز ﺎﺑ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﻣ را ﻣﺪ ﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺪ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ داده رخ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺎر 4 ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎز ﺎﺑ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﮔﺮ ﺷﻮد ﺪ 6 ﺗﺎ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣ داﻧﻠﻮد ﺪ 6 رﺳ اﻋﻼن از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺎر...

Page 150: ...ﻟ 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه 3 د ﮕﺮ ﻓﺮد ﺑﻪ را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻣﺠﺪد ارﺳﺎل ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ارﺳﺎل ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺬف را 3 ﺟﺎر ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺣﺬف 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ درﺑﺎره را اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ 3 ﺑﺮا ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻮع ﺮﻧﺪه 6 ﮔ آدرس ﺧﺮوﺟ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺎم 6 ﭘ اﻧﺪازه ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻧﻮع ﺎم 6 ﭘ زﻣﺎن و ﺗﺎر ﺦ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﺧﺮوﺟ ﺻﻨﺪوق 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺬف ا ﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﺳﺘﺎده را ﭘ ﺎم ﻪ ز...

Page 151: ...ﻫﺪه را ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺎم 6 ﭘ اﺻﻼح اﺟﺎزه و ﺮا ﺶ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺣﺬف را ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺣﺬف ﺎم 6 ﭘ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺟﻬﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺣﺬف را ﭘﻮﺷﻪ 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف r r ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﻮﺗ ﭘﺴﺖ در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻮﺗ ﭘﺴﺘ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺑﻪ ﺎﺑ 6 دﺳﺘ 3 ﺑﺮا را ﺳﺮ ﻌ راه ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ اراﺋﻪ را آن ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻪ 6 ﺻﻮرﺗ در دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻗﺮار ﺷﻤﺎ ﺎر 6 اﺧﺘ در ﺻﻮﺗ ﺳﺮور ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﺎ ﺪ و ﮋﮔ ا ﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﺒﻞ ﻨﺪ 4 ا ﺪ ﺮد...

Page 152: ... ﺑﻪ آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در ﺷﻮد ﻣﻰ داده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻢ 6 ﻣﺴﺘﻘ ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎى ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺎﻣﻬﺎى 6 ﭘ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺎر 4 اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ز ﺮ f t r ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن را ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن و در ﺎﻓﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ G ﻪ 6 وﻗﺘ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﺸﺎن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 3 رو ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻧﻤﻮد ﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب i t r ﻣﻨﻮ ﻋﻨﺎو ﻦ را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻋﻨﺎو ﻦ ا ﺠﺎد ﺑﺮاى اﮔﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﻓﺰودن ﺳﭙﺲ و داده ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣﻰ دا...

Page 153: ...ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺣﺬف را اﻟﮕﻮ ﻨ ﺪ ﺣﺬف ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده آن از ﺟﺪ ﺪ 3 اﻟﮕﻮ ا ﺠﺎد 3 ﺑﺮا ﺟﺪ ﺪ اﻓﺰودن ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺎ ﻣﺘﻨ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ارﺳﺎل ﺟﻬﺖ ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ارﺳﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺮدن 4 و ﺮا ﺶ 3 ﺑﺮا ا ﻦ از و ﺮا ﺶ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺣﺬف را اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻠ ﺣﺬف k u r ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻦ و ﺰ ﺖ ﺎرت را ﺧﻮد ﻧﺎم ﺎرت 4 ﻪ 4 ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ G ﻤ 4 ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ا ﻦ و ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺎر 4 دﻓﺘﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻧﺎم ﺑﺴﺎز ﺪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد ﺪﻫﺎ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺑﺎ را ﻞ...

Page 154: ...ﺎﺑﻠ ا ﻦ ﺷﻮد ﻨﺪ 4 ﻧﻤ ﺪ 6 ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ را ﻣﺘﻦ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻪ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺨﻮاﻫ 6 ﻣ اﮔﺮ SMS ﺰ ﻣﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ از را SMS ﺰ 4 ﻣﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧ i v r ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﭘ ﺎم را ﺧﻮد اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑ ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ اوﻟﻮ ﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ اوﻟﻮ ﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﻣﺪت ﺗﺎ ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ا ﻦ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﺪت ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ 3 ﻧﮕﻬﺪار ﺎم 6 ﭘ ﺰ 4 ﻣﺮ در ﺗﺎن 3 ﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﻪ 4 را زﻣﺎﻧ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﺷﺪ ﻣ ﺷﻮد اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ در روﺷﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺗﺤﻮ ﻞ ﮔﺰارش ﻧﻪ ﺎ ﺷﺪه ﻓ...

Page 155: ...ﺸﻮر 4 از ﺧﺎرج در ﺳﺮو ﺲ ا ﻦ داﺷﺘﻦ ﺎر 6 دراﺧﺘ ﺑﺎ روﻣ ﻨﮓ ﻓﺮا ﮔﻮش ﺷﺪه ارﺳﺎل ﺻﻮﺗ 3 ﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻫﻢ ﺪ 6 دﻫ m u r ﻣﻨﻮ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺎت در ﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺮد 4 ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ در ﺎﻓﺖ را اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ا ﻦ از ﭘﺲ ﺗﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ اﮔﺮ ﺧ ﺮ ﺮد 4 ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ در ﺎﻓﺖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻫﺸﺪار زﻧﮓ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺎم 6 ﭘ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻪ 6 وﻗﺘ ﺑﻠﻪ زد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زﻧﮓ ﺗﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﻣ...

Page 156: ...63 r u r ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺪه ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﭘ ﻐﺎم در ﺎﻓﺖ را ﻐﺎم 6 ﭘ ﻪ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب 3 ﻃﻮر ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺮ 6 ﺧ ﺎ و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻫﺎ ﭘ ﻐﺎم ...

Page 157: ...ﻪ 3 ﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎ 4 ﻓﺮ ADIF ADTS 3 ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎ AAC ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ٨ ﺗﺎ ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ٨ از ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ در ﺖ 6 ﻠﻮﺑ 64 ١٢٨ ١ª ﺖ 6 ﺑ ﻧﺮخ V1 AAC ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ در ﺖ 6 ﻠﻮﺑ 64 ٨ ١ª ﻦ 6 ﺑ ﻧﺮخ V2 ٨ ﺗﺎ ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ٨ از 3 ﺑﺮدار ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺎﻧﺲ 4 ﻓﺮ ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ﺗﺎ ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ٨ از 3 ﺑﺮدار ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺎﻧﺲ 4 ﻓﺮ MP4 M4A اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ در ﺖ 6 ﻠﻮﺑ 64 ٣٢٠ ﺗﺎ ﺖ 6 ﺑ ﻧﺮخ ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ٨ ﺗﺎ ﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ 64 ٨ از 3 ﺑﺮدار ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺎﻧﺲ 4 ﻓﺮ WMA اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ ﻪ 6 ﺛﺎﻧ در ﺖ 6 ﻠﻮﺑ 64 ٣٢٠ ﺗﺎ ﺖ 6 ﺑ...

Page 158: ...3 ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﻫﺎ ﻘ 6 ﻣﻮﺳ در 3 ﺟﺎر ﻘ 6 ﻣﻮﺳ از ﺧﺎﺻ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺎر ﺧﻮد ﺮار 3 ﺗ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ در را روﺷﻦ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻪ 4 ﺻﻮرﺗ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺗ ﺮار ﻣ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﻌ ﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان را MP٣ ﻓﺎ ﻞ G دﻫﺪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺮوﻓﺎ ﻞ زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان آﻧﺮا ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻦ 6 ﻫﻤﭽﻨ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺷﺮا ﻂ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﻮﻻ ﺰر ا ا...

Page 159: ...ﮔﺮ ا ﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻼوه ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺖ 4 ﺣﺮ آﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎ آﻧﺮا اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺎ ﺮده 4 ﺣﺬف را ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه k r t ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺎرﺗﺎن 6 اﺧﺘ در را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ا ﻦ ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ و ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ اﻣ ﺎن ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ اﺗﻔﺎﻗ ﺮدن 4 ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻮﻻ ﺰر 4 ا ﮔﺬارد ﻣ 3 ﺑﺼﺮ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮه و ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺘﻪ 3 ﻧ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﻘ 6 ﻣﻮﺳ 3 ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ را ﺖ ﭙ 4 ﺣﻖ را ﺖ ﭙ 4 ﻣﺤﻠ ﻦ 6 ﻗﻮاﻧ و اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﻦ 6 ﺑ ﻣﻌﺎﻫﺪات 3 ﺑﺮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻻزم ﺷﺎ ﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑ...

Page 160: ...ﺎزﺷﺪﻧ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را روﺷﻨﺎ ﺰان 6 ﻣ روﺷﻨﺎ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﻋ ﺲ اﻧﺪازه اﻧﺪازه ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را زﻣﺎﻧ ﺮ 6 ﺗﺎﺧ ﺗﺎ ﻤﺮ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﻋ ﺲ ﺖ 6 ﻔ 64 ﻔ ﺖ اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ را ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ اﺟﺎزه ﺳﻔ ﺪ ﻧﻮر ﺗﻮازن دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻂ 6 ﻣﺤ دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﺷﺪه ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ آﻟﺒﻮم ﻦ 6 دورﺑ از ﺧﺮوج ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮوج دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎ ﺎ ﺗ ﻋ ﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﻋ ﺲ و ﮋه 3 ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮه ﺟﻠﻮه ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﻓﻼش ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮ...

Page 161: ... ﻧﺸﺎن را ﺷﺪه ﺿﺒﻂ و ﺪ ﻮ 3 ﭙﻬﺎ 6 ﻠ 4 آﻟﺒﻮم و ﺪ ﻮ ﻦ 6 دورﺑ از ﺧﺮوج ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮوج ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را و ﺪ ﻮ ﭗ 6 ﻠ 4 و ﮋه 3 ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮه ﺟﻠﻮه ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﻓﻼش ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ﻓﻼش ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎ ﺰان 6 ﻣ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎ k t ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺴﻬﺎ 3 ﻋ ا ﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻼوه ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ارﺳﺎل و ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را ﻋ ﺴ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ﻨﻪ 6 زﻣ ﭘﺲ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان را ﻋ ﺲ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ٩ ﺜﺮ 4 ﺣﺪا ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺻﻔ...

Page 162: ... ﭗ 6 ﻠ 4 G ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﭘﺨﺶ از را و ﺪ ﻮ ﭗ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ Bluetooth ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ارﺳﺎل ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ارﺳﺎل Bluetooth ﻃﺮ ﻖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 و ﺮا ﺶ را و ﺪ ﻮ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻧﺎم ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺣﺬف را و ﺪ ﻮ ﭗ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺣﺬف ﺣﺬف را و ﺪ ﻮ 3 ﭙﻬﺎ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه و ﺪ ﻮ درﺑﺎره اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت t t ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﻮت ﺿﺒﻂ ﺎم 6 ﭘ ١٠ ﺜﺮ 4 ﺣﺪا اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗ ﺎدداﺷﺖ ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺜﺮ 4 ﺣﺪا ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣ ﺻ...

Page 163: ...ﺣﺬف ﺎ ﺮده 4 ﭘﺨﺶ را ﺷﺪه ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺗ 3 ﺎدداﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ u t ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت f u t ﻣﻨﻮ دورﺑ ﻦ ﺷﻮد ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ روﺷﻦ 3 رو اﮔﺮ ﺎر ﺧﻮد ﺳﺎز ذﺧ ﺮه ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻠﻪ 6 ﻣ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺑﺪون ﺎر 4 ﺧﻮد ﻃﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ دﻫﺪ ﻣ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ ﺴﻬﺎ 3 ﻋ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﺣﺬف ﺮد ﺪ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺗﺎ ا ﻨ ﻪ از ﺑﻌﺪ را ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ i u t ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓ ﻠﻤﺒﺮدار دورﺑ ﻦ اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ و ﺪ ﻮ ﻠ ﭙﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬف دﻫﺪ ﻣ را و ﺪ ﻮ 3 ﭙﻬﺎ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﻣﺪ ...

Page 164: ...ﺎر ﺎ ﻨﻮﻧ 4 زﻣﺎن وﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ و ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ٢ ﻦ 6 ﺑ را ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ زﻣﺎن ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﻞ 3 ﺷ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ١٢ i u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺎت 6 ﻋﻤﻠ f i u ﻣﻨﻮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺸﮕﺮ را ﻨﻪ 6 زﻣ ﭘﺲ ﺗﺼﺎو ﺮ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺖ در زﻣ ﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻓﺮض ﭘ ﺶ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻨﻪ 6 زﻣ ﭘﺲ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ را ﺸﻦ 6 ﻤ 6 اﻧ ﺎ ﺗﺼﻮ ﺮ G ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ...

Page 165: ... ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺮ 6 ﺗﺎﺛ ﺰ 6 ﻧ زﺑﺎن 3 ورود ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ا ﻦ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ ﮔﺬاﺷﺖ k u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻓﻌﺎل را ﺗﻠﻔﻨ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ G ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط f k u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﺮو ﺲ د ﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺑﻪ را ﻫﺎ داده ﺗﻤﺎس ﻓ ﺲ 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺗ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل را ﺻﻮﺗ 3 ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮل اﮔﺮ ا...

Page 166: ...ﺎﻟﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﺳﺘﻮرات ﺗﻤﺎم ز ﺮﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه داده ﻧﺸﺎن ز ﺮ در ﻣ ﺎﻟﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﻨ ﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزد ﻣ ﻓﻌﺎل را ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺻﻮﺗ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣ در ﻋﻤﻠ ﺮد ا ﻦ ﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ 6 ﭘ ﺰ 4 ﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺴﺮ 6 ﻣ ﻓ ﺴﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ و اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻧ د ﮕﺮ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ وارد اﻧﺘﻘﺎل 3 ﺑﺮا را ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻤﺎره ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ ﺮه 6 ذﺧ را ﺮ 6 اﺧ ﺷﻤﺎره È ﻨ ﺪ ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزد ﻣ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل 6 ﻏ را ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺪ 6...

Page 167: ... و ﻪ 3 ﺷﺒ ﺑﻪ ﻪ 3 ﺷﺒ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ را ﺗﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﻣ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ اﮔﺮ از 3 رو ﺧﻂ ٢ ﺳﺮو ﺲ وﺟﻮد ﺻﻮرت در ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘ ٢ و ١ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ا ﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﻌﺎل ﺻﻮرت در داده ﻧﺸﺎن دوم ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 3 رو ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره د ﮕﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻏ ﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ا ﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﻌﺎل ﺻﻮرت در ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داده ﻧﺸﺎن دوم ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 3 رو ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره د ﮕﺮ ﺷﺪ m k u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻤﺎس اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻪ 3...

Page 168: ...4 روﺷﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ ﻧﻤﻮدن ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺪ 4 ﻦ 6 ﭘ ﺮدن 4 وارد 3 ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺪ 4 ﻦ 6 ﭘ 3 ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ا ﻤﻨ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ در ١ ﺪ 6 ﻓﺸﺎردﻫ را ﺳﭙﺲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش روﺷﻦ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ٢ ﻪ 6 زﻣﺎﻧ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺪﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را ﺷﺪه ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ وﺿﻊ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺨﻮاﻫ اﮔﺮ ٣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد را ﺪ 4 ﻦ 6 ﭘ ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﻣ روﺷﻦ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد ﻏﻠﻂ ﺪ 4 ﻦ 6 ﭘ ﺑﺎر ٣ از ﺸﺘﺮ 6 ﺑ اﮔﺮ ﺎز 6 ﻧ PUK Code ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻗﻔﻞ ﻦ 6...

Page 169: ...ﺪود ﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻨ 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ از ﻨ 6 ﻣﻌ ﺗﻌﺪاد در ﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ا ﻦ 3 ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ دارد ﺎز 6 ﻧ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺖ 6 ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ رﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ا ﻦ ﮕﺮدد 6 ﻣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ را ز ﺮ ﺧﺮوﺟ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺻﺎدره 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎم ﺖ 6 ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﺳﺮو ﺲ اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﺑ ﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻞ ﻦ 6 ﺑ ﺻﺎدره 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎم 3 ﺑﺮا ﺖ 6 ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﺳﺮو ﺲ روﻣ ﻨﮓ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻟﻤﻠﻠ ﺑ ﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻞ ﻦ 6 ﺑ ﺻﺎدره 3 ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺖ 6 ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺧﻮد ﺸﻮر 4 اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ورود ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ وارده 3 ﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺖ 6 ...

Page 170: ... ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺤﺪود ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻏ ﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺪ 6 ﺑ ﻨ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺮ 6 ﻏ را ﻦ 6 ﻣﻌ 3 ﺮ 6 ﮔ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻋﻤﻞ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻦ 6 ﻣﻌ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻪ 4 ﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ را ﺷﺪه 3 ﺮ 6 ﮔ t m u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺪ ﺗﻐ ﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ 3 ﺑﺮا ﻪ 4 اﺳﺖ ﺷﺨﺼ ﻫﻮ ﺖ ﺷﻤﺎره PIN ﺸﻮد 6 ﻣ ﺑ ﺎرﺑﺮده ﻣﺠﺎز ﺮ 6 ﻏ ﻨﻨﺪه 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺪ i ﭘ ﻦ ﺪ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺪﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺪﻫﺎ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ اﻣﻨ ﺘ ﺪ 6 ﺑﺪﻫ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را ٢ ﻦ 6 ﭘ ﺪ 4 ا ﻤﻨ ﺪ...

Page 171: ...ا ﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮات ﻪ 6 ﺷﺮﻃ ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺒﺮ ﺪ ﺎر 4 ﺗﻤﺎس ﻋﺪم ﺻﻮرت در ﻨﺪ 4 ﺒﺎﻧ 6 ﭘﺸﺘ ﺷﻤﺎ 3 ﺑﺮا را ﺷﺒ ﻪ د ﮕﺮداده ﺷﺒ ﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﻣ ﺎن ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺸﻮد 6 ﻣ ﺗﺮﺟ ﺢ ﻣﻮرد از ﻗﺒﻞ و ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ را ﻣﺮﺟﺢ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻨﺪ 6 ﻣ ﺗﻼش ﺗﻠﻔﻦ د ﮕﺮ ﺷﺒ ﻪ در ﺛﺒﺖ 3 ﺑﺮا ﻮﺷﺶ 4 ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ از ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ا ﻦ ﻨﺪ 4 ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻞ 6 ﺗﺸ ﺷﺪه ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ ً ﻼ ﻗﺒ ﮕﺮدد 6 ﻣ i r u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ دو ﻦ 6...

Page 172: ...ﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ 4 ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﺎل 3 ﺑﺮا ﺎزدار ﺪ 6 ﻧ ﺘ 6 اﻣﻨ v u ﻣﻨﻮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ وﺿﻌ ﺖ f v u ﻣﻨﻮ داﺧﻠ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﮔﻮﺷ ﺎرﺑﺮ 4 ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺖ 6 وﺿﻌ ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ا ﻦ i v u ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن را ﮔﻮﺷ 3 ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺖ 6 وﺿﻌ ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ا ﻦ دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ...

Page 173: ... و ﻫﺎ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺑﺮدن ﺑ ﺎر ﻣ داده ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ ﺧﺎﻧﮕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻪ 4 ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣ ﺑﺴﺘﮕ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت و ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﻨﻨﺪه 4 اراﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﺎت ﺷﻮد ﺳﺎ ﺘ وب ﻫﺮ URL آدرس ﺮدن 4 وارد ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ دارد ﺪ 6 ﺑﺎﺷ داﺷﺘﻪ دﺳﺘﺮﺳ آن ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را E ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﻫﺮزﻣﺎن در ﻣﺮورﮔﺮ از ﺧﺮوج 3 ﺑﺮا ﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﺎز ﺧﻮد ﺑﺎش آﻣﺎده ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﺮدد ﻣ ﺑﺎز ﻗﺒﻠ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ WAP ﺎوﺷﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭘ ﻤﺎ ﺶ ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ در وب ﺎوﺷﮕﺮ 4 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 3 ﺪﻫﺎ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺪ...

Page 174: ...ﺼﺐ ﺶ 6 ﭘ از 3 ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ا ﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺮد 4 ﺣﺬف ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ا ﺠﺎد ﺑﺮا ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ١ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺪ 6 ﺗﺄ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 و ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﻓﺰودن ٢ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﺪ 6 ﺗﺄ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ URL آدرس و ﻋﻨﻮان ﺮدن 4 وارد از ﭘﺲ ٣ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر را دﺳﺘﺮس در ز ﺮ 3 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣﻮردﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﭘﺲ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه 3 ﮔﺬار ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ آدرس ﺑﻪ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﻃﺮ ﻖ از اﺗﺼﺎل ﺷﻮ ﺪ وﺻﻞ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را آن ﺟﺪ ﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ا ﺠﺎد 3...

Page 175: ...ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻓﻌﺎل را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻨ ﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل WAP ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻤﺎت 6 ﺗﻨﻈ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ و و ﺮا ﺶ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺗﻨﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﺳﺘﻔﺎده آن از ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘ آدرس ﻪ 4 ﺪﻫﺪ 6 ﻣ اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ اﺻﻠ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎ ﮕﺎه ﻋﻨﻮان ﺑﻪ آن از و وارد را ﺧﻮد ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺳﺎ ﺖ URL ﺗﺎ ﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮورت ﺷﻤﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻓﺮﻣﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺻﻠ ﺧﻮدﺑﺨﻮد آﻧﺮا وب ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﮔﺮ ز ﺮا ﻧﺪار ﺪ HTTP داد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ا ﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ SAT ﺧﺪﻣﺎت از ﺷﻤﺎ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﻪ 4 ﺻﻮرﺗ در ﻧﺎم ﻣﻨﻮ ا ﻦ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺒﺎﻧ 6 ﭘﺸﺘ 3 ﻫﺎ...

Page 176: ...ﻦ 66 ﺗﻌ زﻣﺎن در ﺑﺎ ﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺖ ﺣﺮ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪه وارد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﮔﺮ آن ﺑﻪ دﺧﻮل از ﭘﺲ ﺷﻮ ﺪ ﺑﻮد ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺎده وب ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ١ ٠٠ ﺎ ٩ª٠٠ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺳﺮﻋﺖ GPRS ﻪ 4 زﻣﺎﻧ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻣ ﺎن ا ﻦ GPRS ﻧﻈ ﻤﺎت ﺒﺎﺷﺪ 6 ﻣ دﺳﺘﺮس در ﮔﺮدد اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 وارد ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ورود 3 ﺑﺮا را APN APN وارد ﺳﺮور ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎس 3 ﺑﺮا را ﺎرﺑﺮ 4 ﻫﻮ ﺖ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻫﻮ ﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎ وارد ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﺑﻪ ورود 3 ﺑﺮا را ﻋﺒﻮر رﻣﺰ ﻠﻤﻪ 4 ﻋﺒﻮر رﻣﺰ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤ...

Page 177: ... 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ را 3 اﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﺠﻮز ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻋﺘﺒﺎر اﺳﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﺪ 6 ﻨ 6 ﺑﺒ را ﺷﺨﺼ 3 ﻣﺠﻮزﻫﺎ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻟ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﺨﺼ ا ﺪ ﺮده 4 ﺮه 6 ذﺧ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ﻪ 4 i v ﻣﻨﻮ ﺎرت ﺳ ﻢ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺎرت ﺳ ﻢ ﺑﻪ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﺎﺻ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮاﺗ ﺳﺮو ﺲ دﻫﻨﺪه اراﺋﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ از ﺑﺎﻧ 3 ﺎرﻫﺎ 4 اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺎرت 4 ﻢ 6 ﺳ ﻃﺮ ﻖ از را ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ا ﻦ از 3 ﺑﺮا اﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺪ اراﺋﻪ ﺮه 6 ﻏ و ﺳﻬﺎم ﺑﺎزار اﺻﻠ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ 3 اﻧﺘﻬﺎ در ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﻧ...

Page 178: ...4 ﺑﺎز 3 ﺑﺮا ﭼﭗ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ ﺪ 6 دﻫ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺳﺖ دﺳﺘﺮس در ز ﺮ 3 ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺷﺮوع را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺷﺮوع دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺶ را ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺟﺎوا 3 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ از ﺑﺮﺧ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ را ا ﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ 3 ﺑﺮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺎز 6 ﻧ داده ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد ﻣ ا ﺠﺎد ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻋﻼن ﺑﺪون اﺗﺼﺎل ﻫﻤ ﺸﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﺪه 6 ﭘﺮﺳ ﺷﻤﺎ از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل از ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺴﺖ 6 ﻧ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺗﺼﺎﻟ ﭻ 6 ﻫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺘﻪ 3 ...

Page 179: ...ﺎﻣﻪ ﺮد 4 ﺣﺬف ﺎ اﺟﺮا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ JAR ﺎ JAD 3 ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺘﻪ 3 ﻧ ﻓﺎ ﻞ و اﺳﺖ ﺟﺎوا ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ از ﻓﺸﺮده ﻓﺮﻣﺖ G JAR ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ر ﺰ ﻪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻔ 6 ﺗﻮﺻ ﻓﺎ ﻞ JAD ﺷﺒ ﻪ ﻃﺮ ﻖ از و ﺮدن 4 داﻧﻠﻮد از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را JAD ﻓﺎ ﻞ در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﻔﺎت 6 ﺗﻮﺻ ﻪ 6 ﻠ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ J2ME اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد زﺑﺎن اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ ﺎر 4 وﻗﺘ ﻧﻮع 3 ﺑﺮا اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺧﺎﺻ 3 ﻫﺎ ﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ 4 ﻪ 6 ﻣﺎداﻣ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎوا 3 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﺻ ﺟﺎوا ﺑ...

Page 180: ... ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﭘ ﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﻮد ارﺳﺎل MMS ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣ ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ﻋ ﺲ ارﺳﺎل Bluetooth ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ارﺳﺎل Bluetooth k x ﻣﻨﻮ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎ ﺎر 6 اﺧﺘ در را ز ﺮ 3 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺰ ﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﻗﺮار ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان را ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ 3 ﺻﺪا زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان ﺗﻨﻈ ﻢ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﻢ 6 ﺗﻨﻈ زﻧﮓ آﻫﻨﮓ ﺎ SMS ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ﺗﻮان ﻣ را 3 ﻣﻠﻮد 3 ﺻﺪا ﭘ ﺎم ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﻮد ارﺳﺎل MMS ﻃﺮ ﻖ از آﻫﻨﮓ 3 ﻣﻠﻮد ارﺳﺎل Bluetooth ﻃﺮ ﻖ از ارﺳﺎل Bluetooth اﺣﺘ ﺎط J2ME Java 2 Micro E...

Page 181: ...ﺶ در را ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ا ﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺎت 6 ﺟﺰ ﺪ 6 ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎ USB ﺳﺎز ذﺧ ﺮه رﺳﺎﻧﻪ UMS اﺟﺎزه ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ USB 3 ﺳﺎز ﺮه 6 ذﺧ رﺳﺎﻧﻪ UMS ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ در ﺷﺪه ﺮه 6 ذﺧ 3 ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ 3 ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎ دﻫﺪ ﻣ ﺑﻌﻨﻮان آﻧﺮا و ﺮده 4 ﺎر 4 ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎ ﺖ ١٢٨ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻠﻔﻦ داﺧﻠ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺤﺴﻮب USB f ﻣﺸﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 G 3 ا اﺿﺎﻓﻪ اﻓﺰار ﻧﺮم ﭻ 6 ﻫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺎز 6 ﻧ ﺖ 6 ﻗﺎﺑﻠ ا ﻦ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻠﻮﺑﺎ ﺖ 64 ª٠ ﺜﺮ 4 ﺣﺪا JPG 3 ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺴﺖ 6 ﻧ 3 ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ و ...

Page 182: ...3 ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﭙ 4 و ﺻﻮﺗ MP WMA AAC AAC ABC MP٣ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮان ﻣ را ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ا ﻦ در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد 3 ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ WAV ﺮد 4 ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ MP٣ ﻨﻨﺪه 4 ﭘﺨﺶ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻦ 6 دورﺑ ﺑﺎ ﻪ 4 ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ 3 ﺑﺮا ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ا ﻦ ﺴﻬﺎ 3 ﻋ ﺷﺪه داده اﺧﺘﺼﺎص ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺘﺎﻟ 6 د ﺠ 3 ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ را ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ اﺳﺖ ﭙ 4 ﺷﺨﺼ ﻮﺗﺮ 6 ﺎﻣﭙ 4 ﺑﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از ﭼﺴﺒﺎﻧﺪن و ﭙ 4 ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻮﺗﺮ 6 ﺎﻣﭙ 4 از را ﺟﺪ ﺪ 3 ﻋ ﺴﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ا ﻨ ﻪ وﺟﻮد ﺑﺎ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ در را آﻧﻬ...

Page 183: ...ﺮ ا ﻦ در ﻣﻮﺟﻮد 3 ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﻨﺪ 4 ﻣ ﺒﺎﻧ 6 ﭘﺸﺘ ﻣﻦ 3 و ﺪ ﻮ ﻣﺪ ﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘ ﻣﻨﻮ در ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در را ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه را USB ﻠﻪ 6 وﺳ ﺪ 6 رﺳ اﺗﻤﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎ ﻞ ﺗﺒﺎدل ﺎر 4 ﻪ 4 زﻣﺎﻧ È ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺟﺪا ﺗﻠﻔﻦ از را ﺎﺑﻞ 4 و ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ Windows از در ﺎﻓﺘ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺗﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﭙ 4 اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪه ﭘﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻪ 4 زﻣﺎﻧ ﺗﺎ ﺶ 6 ﭘ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ در ﺗﻮ در ﺗﻮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ١٠ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﺗﻮاﻧ ﻣ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺮ 66 ﺗﻐ را ﻓﺮض ﺶ 6 ﭘ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ...

Page 184: ... ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ١ را 3 ﺳﺎز ﻓﻌﺎل و ﺮده 4 ﺑﺎز را ﻣﻮدم اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ در ٢ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺪ 6 ﺗﺎ ﺷﺨﺼ ﻮﺗﺮ 6 ﺎﻣﭙ 4 ﺑﻪ USB ﺎﺑﻞ 4 از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎ را ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ٣ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 3 اﻧﺪاز راه را ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ و ﺮده 4 وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻣ ﻪ 6 ﺗﻮﺻ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻮدم ﺑﺎ ﺎرﺗﺎن 4 ا ﻨ ﻪ از ﺑﻌﺪ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺮﻓﻌﺎل 6 ﻏ ﻣﻮدم اﺑﺰارﻫﺎ 3 ﻣﻨﻮ از آﻧﺮا ﺗﻮﺟﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻘﻪ 6 دﻗ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺻﺒﺮ USB وﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ در ﺑ ﺎر آﻣﺎده ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻪ 4 ﺣﺎﻟ در را ﺎر 4 ا ﻦ ﺳﭙﺲ و ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺪ 6 دﻫ...

Page 185: ... ﺧﻮد ﮔﻮﺷ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺧﻮد ﺷﺨﺼ ﺗﺮ ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ ﻪ 6 ﺗﻬ را آﻧﻬﺎ از ﺪام 4 ﻫﺮ ﺪ 6 ﺘﻮاﻧ 6 ﻣ ﺷﺨﺼ ﺎز 6 ﻧ اﺳﺎس ﺑﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ 3 ﺑﺮا 3 ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﻬﺖ اﺳﺘﺮ ﻮ ﺒ ﺗﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ و ﻣﻮز ﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺨﺶ ﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻨﺪزﻓﺮ ﮔﻮﺷ و ﺮوﻓﻦ 3 ﻣ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﺎ ﺎن و ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻨﻨﺪه 4 ﻨﺘﺮل 4 ﺪ 6 ﻠ 4 G ﻣﻮز ﻨﻨﺪه 4 ﭘﺨﺶ ﻨﺘﺮل 4 ﺮوﻓﻦ 6 ﻣ و ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻨﻨﺪه 4 ﻨﺘﺮل 4 و ﮔﻮﺷ اﺗﺼﺎل از ﭘﺲ راﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ را ﻨﻨﺪه 4 ﻨﺘﺮل 4 3 اﻧﺘﻬﺎ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺑﺎ ﻞ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ در ﮔﻮﺷ ﺪ 6 ﻨ 4 ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮا...

Page 186: ...ﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم از ﺸﻪ 6 ﻫﻤ ا ﻦ ﺮ 6 ﻏ در ﺪ 6 ﻧﻤﺎﺋ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده LG ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم از ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮود ﻦ 6 ﺑ از ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﺷ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ از اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤ ﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺳﺮو ﺲ ﺰ 4 ﻣﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺸﺘﺮ 6 ﺑ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت 3 ﺑﺮا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺮ ﺪ 6 ﺑﮕ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﺟﺎﻧﺒ ﻟﻮازم ...

Page 187: ...94 ﻓﻨ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣ M6100 ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻧﺎم GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 ﺴﺘﻢ 6 ﺳ ﻣﺤ ﻂ ﺣﺮارت ﺷﺎرژ ﻪ 6 ﺗﺨﻠ 55 C ﺜﺮ 4 ا ﺣﺪ ﺷﺎرژ 45 C 10 C اﻗﻞ ﺣﺪ ﻓﻨ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ...

Page 188: ...M6100 USER S GUIDE Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider ENGLISH ...

Page 189: ...CTIONS 20 Making and answering calls 20 Adjusting the volume 21 Answering a call 21 Entering text 22 In call menu 24 MENU TREE 28 SELECTING FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS 30 PROFILES 31 Activate 31 Personalise 31 Rename 32 CALL REGISTER 33 Missed calls 33 Received calls 33 Dialled calls 33 Delete recent calls 34 Call charges 34 GPRS information 35 TOOLS 36 Alarm clock 36 Bluetooth 36 Calculator 37 Unit con...

Page 190: ...ettings 52 MULTIMEDIA 54 MP3 54 Camera 56 Video camera 56 My Photos 57 My video 57 Voice recorder 58 Settings 58 SETTINGS 59 Date Time 59 Phone settings 59 Call settings 60 Security settings 63 Network settings 64 GPRS SETTING 65 Reset settings 65 Memory status 65 SERVICE 66 Internet 67 SIM service 69 DOWNLOADS 70 Games Apps 70 Images 71 Sounds 71 File Storage 72 ACCESSORIES 75 TECHNICAL DATA 76 ...

Page 191: ...mobile communication technology This user s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user s guide could void your warranty for this equipment ...

Page 192: ... standardized methods with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves The SAR limit recommended by the international Commission on Non Ionizing Radiation Protection ICNIRP which is 2W kg avera...

Page 193: ... object as it may damage the phone Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture Use the accessories like an earphone cautiously Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference which could affect performance Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers i e in your breast p...

Page 194: ...fueling point Don t use near fuel or chemicals Do not transport or store flammable gas liquid or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle which contains your mobile phone and accessories In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft Turn off your mobile phone before boarding any aircraft Do not use it on the ground without crew permission Children Keep the phone in a safe pl...

Page 195: ...imize the battery life Do not disassemble or short circuit the battery pack Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance The battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability Do not expose the battery charger to direct ...

Page 196: ... standby mode with the phone open Controls the earpiece volume during a phone call 2 Front screen Right side view 3 Headset jack Connect a headset here 4 Camera MP3 key Open the slide to reveal the camera lens Press this key shortly to enter Multimedia menu directly Press this key for a long time to activate MP3 3 4 1 2 ...

Page 197: ...ge quality 2 Flash 3 Holes for a carrying strap 4 Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover 5 Battery pack 6 SIM card socket 7 SIM card terminals 8 Battery terminals 9 Charger connector Cable connector 10 M6100 FEATURES M6100 features 3 1 2 4 6 5 7 8 9 ...

Page 198: ...y Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls You can also quickly access the latest incoming outgoing and missed calls by pressing the key in standby mode 4 Alphanumeric keys Enter numbers letters and some special characters 6 8 7 10 11 1 2 12 9 3 4 5 Note To prevent the difficulty in hearing of the other side slide open while using phone ...

Page 199: ... 9 Confirm key Selects menu options and confirms actions 10 End Power key Used to end a call or reject a call and also to go back to standby mode Hold this key down to turn the phone on off 11 Clear key Deletes a character with each press Hold the key down to clear all input Use this key to go back to a previous screen 12 Special function keys 0 A long press of this key enters the international ca...

Page 200: ... charge Indicates the receipt of a message Indicates the receipt of a voice message Indicates that the vibration ringer has been set Indicates the Loud profile is activated Indicates the Silent profile is activated Indicates the Headset profile is activated The quality of the conversation may change depending on network coverage When the signal strength is below 2 bars you may experience muting ca...

Page 201: ...e WAP Indicates that you are using GPRS Agenda event set Call divert service active Bluetooth enabled 14 M6100 FEATURES M6100 features Note When the status of the battery indicates low you may not use Camera or Multimedia function While using Multimedia function the status of the battery is changeable ...

Page 202: ...M card into the SIM card holder Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards To remove the SIM card press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction Note Removing the battery from the phone when the power is on may cause the phone to malfunction To insert the SIM card To remove the SIM card Caution The metal contact of the S...

Page 203: ...lace 2 Connect the other end of the mains adapter to the mains socket Only use the charger included in the box 3 The moving bars of battery icon will stop after charging is complete 16 GETTING STARTED Getting started Caution Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and or the charger If you use the battery pack charger out of your own country use an attachment plug adapter for the p...

Page 204: ...er cord and charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire Make sure that no sharp edged items such as animal teeth or nails come into contact with the battery There is a risk of this causing a fire Do not place or answer calls while charging the phone as it may short circuit the phone and or cause electric shock or fire Note Ensure the battery is fully charged before using the ph...

Page 205: ...econds until the LCD screen is turned off Access codes You can use the access codes described in this section to avoid unauthorised use of your phone The access codes except PUK and PUK2 codes can be changed by using the Change codes feature Menu 7 4 6 PIN code 4 to 8 digits The PIN Personal Identification Number code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use The PIN code is usually supplied...

Page 206: ...gits The PUK2 code supplied with some SIM cards is required to change a blocked PIN2 code If you lose the code please contact your network operator Security code 4 to 8 digits The security code protects the unauthorised use of your phone The default security code is set to 0000 and the security code is required to delete all phone entries and to activate the Reset settings menu Also the security c...

Page 207: ...ll be displayed 2 Select the desired number by using the up down navigation keys 3 Press Sto call the number Making an international call 1 Press and hold the 0key for the international prefix The character automatically selects the international access code 2 Enter the country code area code and the phone number 3 Press Sto call the number Ending a call When you have finished your call press the ...

Page 208: ... one of the side keys on the left side of the phonewithout opening the phone You can answer a call while using the address book or other menu features 2 To end the call close the phone or press the Ekey Manner mode Quick You can activate the manner mode by pressing and holding down the Lkey after opening the phone Signal strength You can check the strength of your signal by the signal indicator on...

Page 209: ...ired letter once twice three or four times until the letter is displayed 123 mode Number mode Type numbers using one keystroke per number To change to 123 mode in a text entry field press the key until 123 mode is displayed Changing the text input mode 1 When you are in a field that allows characters to be entered you will notice the text input mode indicator in the top right corner of the LCD scr...

Page 210: ...od Press 4663 down navigation key to type Home If the desired word is missing from the word choice list add it using the ABC mode You can select the language of the T9 mode Press the left soft key Option then select T9 languages Select the desired language of T9 mode You can also turn off the T9 mode by selecting T9 off The default setting on the phone is T9 enabled mode 2 Enter the whole word bef...

Page 211: ...x y z 9 0 Space 0 Space 0 Using the 123 Number mode The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message a telephone number for example Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode You can quickly switch from letters to numbers by pressing and holding down the key In call menu Your phone provides a number of control fu...

Page 212: ...ting is only available if your network supports it For details of how to activate and deactivate it see Call waiting Menu 7 3 4 If Call waiting is activated you can put the first call on hold and answer the second by pressing Sor by selecting the left soft key then Hold Answer You can end the current call and answer the waiting call by selecting the left soft key and then End Answer Rejecting an i...

Page 213: ...y the person who set up the multiparty call These options are all available from the In Call menu The maximum callers in a multiparty call are five Once started you are in control of the multiparty call and only you can add callers to the multiparty call Making a second call You can make a second call while currently on a call Enter the second number and press the Skey When the second call is conn...

Page 214: ...g a conference call To have a private call with one caller from a conference call display the number of the caller you wish to talk to on the screen then press the left soft key Select the Conference Private to put all the other callers on hold Ending a conference call The currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the Ekey To end a conference call press the ...

Page 215: ...led calls 4 Delete recent calls 5 Call charges 6 GPRS information 3 TOOLS 1 Alarm clock 2 Bluetooth 3 Calculator 4 Unit converter 5 World time 6 Answering phone 7 Modem 4 ORGANISER 1 Contacts 2 Calendar 3 Memo 4 Calendar settings 5 MESSAGES 1 New message 2 Inbox 3 Outbox 4 Drafts 5 Listen to voice mail 6 Info message 7 Templates 8 Settings ...

Page 216: ...y videos 6 Voice Recorder 7 Settings 7 SETTINGS 1 Date Time 2 Phone settings 3 Call settings 4 Security settings 5 Network settings 6 GPRS setting 7 Reset settings 8 Memory status 8 SERVICE 1 Internet 2 SIM service 9 DOWNLOADS 1 Games Apps 2 Images 3 Sounds 4 File Storage ...

Page 217: ...ccessed via the two soft keys marked and Each menu and sub menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function The role of the soft keys vary according to the current context or the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role Menu Names Press the left soft key to access the available menu Press the right soft key to access the available Name...

Page 218: ...1 x 2 Scroll to the desired profile in the Profile list After pressing the left soft key or the OK key select Personalise The profile setting option opens Set the options as required Call alert type Set the alert type for incoming calls Ring tone Select the desired ring tone from the list Ring volume Set the volume of the ringing tone Message alert type Set the alert type for messages Message tone...

Page 219: ...e will answer automatically After 10 secs After 10 seconds the phone will answer automatically Rename Menu 1 x 3 You can rename a profile and give it any name you want 1 To change the name of a profile scroll to the profile in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key or the OK key select Rename 2 Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the left soft key OK 32 PROFILES Profiles...

Page 220: ...ame for the number and save both in the phonebook Send a message to this number Delete the call from the list Received calls Menu 2 2 This option lets you view the last 10 incoming calls You can also View the number if available and call it or save it in the phonebook Enter a new name for the number and save both in the phonebook Send a message to this number Delete the call from the list Dialled ...

Page 221: ...ressing the left soft key Yes Call costs Menu 2 5 2 Allows you to check the cost of your last call all calls remaining and reset the cost To reset the cost you need to know your PIN2 code Settings SIM Dependent Menu 2 5 3 Set tariff You can set the currency type and the unit price Contact your service providers to obtain charging unit prices To select the currency or unit in this menu you need the...

Page 222: ...gh the GPRS information option In addition you can also view how much time you are online Call duration Menu 2 6 1 You can check the duration of Last call and All calls You can also reset the call timers Data volumes Menu 2 6 2 You can check the Sent Last All Received Last All or All data volumes and Reset all ...

Page 223: ...s and so on When you receive data from another Bluetooth device the phone requests for a confirmation After confirming the transfer the file will be copied in your phone Depending on the file type it will be stored in the following folders MP3 MP3 folder Menu 6 1 2 Video 3GP video folder Menu 6 5 Phonebook contacts VCF Phonebook Menu 4 1 1 Other files File storage folder Menu 9 4 Paired devices Me...

Page 224: ...e numbers 4 Press Okey to view the result 5 To input the decimal number press key If you press key you can enter 6 To end Calculator press the right soft key Back Unit converter Menu 3 4 This converts any measurement into a unit you want There are 9 types that can be converted into units Currency Surface Length Weight Temperature Volume Velocity Shoes and Clothes 1 You can select one of four unit ...

Page 225: ...he answering phone mode as General Meeting Menu 3 6 2 You can adjust the answering phone mode as Meeting Driving Menu 3 6 3 You can adjust the answering phone mode as Driving User defined 1 2 Menu 3 6 4 5 You can personalize answering phone mode as you want by recording your voice The submenus Activate Allows to Activate answering phone mode which you selected Listen to voice guide Allow you to li...

Page 226: ...ge You can send a short text message to the caller who leave voice message Ringing time Menu 3 6 7 Allow you to set your phone when the answering mode will be activated After 3 Secs After 3 Seconds your phone will be activated to answering phone mode After 5 Secs After 5 Seconds your phone will be activated to answering phone mode After 10 Secs After 10 Seconds your phone will be activated to answ...

Page 227: ...le with Bluetooth through Bluetooth Copy You can copy an entry from SIM to phone or from phone to SIM Main number You can select the one out of mobile home office that you often use After you set this the main number will be displayed first when you search Delete You can delete an entry Add new Menu 4 1 2 You can add phonebook entry by using this function Phone memory capacity is 1000 entries SIM ...

Page 228: ...dd member You can add group members Each group should not exceed 20 members Remove member You can remove the member from the Group member list But the name and the number will remain in the phonebook Rename You can change a group name Speed dial Menu 4 1 4 Assign contacts to any of the keys 2to 9 You can then call that contact by pressing the corresponding number key 1 Open the phonebook first by ...

Page 229: ...o Phone memory and vice versa 1 Open the Phonebook first by pressing the right soft key Names in standby mode 2 Scroll to Copy all and then press the left soft key OK to enter this menu SIM to Phone You can copy move the entries from SIM Card to Phone memory Phone to SIM You can copy move the entries from Phone memory to SIM Card 3 You can see the following submenus Keep original When copying the ...

Page 230: ...irst by pressing the right soft key Names in standby mode Select Information by pressing the left soft key OK 2 Scroll to Memory status then press the left soft key OK Own number SIM dependent You can check and save your own number in the SIM card Calendar Menu 4 2 When you enter this menu a Calendar will be displayed The month and year are shown at the top of the screen Whenever you change the da...

Page 231: ...n delete the past schedule that is no longer required Delete all Menu 4 2 4 You can delete all notes Go to date Menu 4 2 5 You can go to the chosen date directly Set alarm tone Menu 4 2 6 You can set the alarm tone Memo Menu 4 3 1 Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key OK 2 If the entry is empty add new by pressing the left soft key Add 3 Input the memo and then press the left soft key OK C...

Page 232: ... how to enter text refer to page 24 through 26 Entering Text 2 After you complete the message to select the required option press the left soft key Options The following options are available Send Enter the number or select the number from the phonebook or the recent numbers You can send a message up to 6 phone numbers at a time Press the left soft key Options The following options will be display...

Page 233: ...s card You can attach your name card Write multimedia message Menu 5 1 2 A multimedia message can contain text images and or sound clips This feature can be used only if it is supported by your network operator or service provider Only devices that offer compatible multimedia message or e mail features can receive and send multimedia messages 1 Key in the multimedia message Using the right soft ke...

Page 234: ...ect the language for T9 input mode You can also deactivate the T9 input mode by selecting T9 off Exit If you select this whilst writing a message you will be taken back to the message menu Also the written message will not have been saved 5 Press the right soft key Insert You can insert a symbol photo or create a new photo sound new sound template my Business card and contacts Inbox Menu 5 2 You w...

Page 235: ...formation about received messages Sender s address Subject only for Multimedia message Message date time Message type Message size Delete all You can delete all messages Specific MMS options Repeat Allows you to repeat reproduction of the selected multimedia message Receive for multimedia message notification only Multimedia messages unlike text messages must be downloaded from the server automati...

Page 236: ... the current message to other recipients Delete You can delete the current message Information You can view information about outbox messages Recipient s address Subject only for Multimedia message Message date time Message type Message size Delete all You can delete all messages in the outbox When you didn t send the message View You can view messages you didn t Delete You can delete the current ...

Page 237: ...ovider for details of their service in order to configure the handset correctly Info message Menu 5 6 Dependant to network and subscription Info service messages are text messages sent by the network to mobile phone users They provide general information such as weather reports traffic news taxis pharmacies and stock prices When you receive an info service message a popup message will indicate a n...

Page 238: ...edit the selected template Delete all Deletes all templates Multimedia templates Menu 5 7 2 You can use the following options View Views the selected message Delete Deletes the template Add new Uses this to create new template Write Message To send via Text message or Multimedia message Edit Use this to edit the selected template Delete all Deletes all templates My business card Menu 5 7 3 This op...

Page 239: ... supported by some network operators SMS centre If you want to send the text message you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu Multimedia message Menu 5 8 2 Priority You can set the priority of the message you choose Validity period This network service allows you to set how long your multimedia messages will be stored at the message centre Delivery report If it is set to Yes in ...

Page 240: ...ome Roaming Even when you are in abroad you can listen to voice mails if a roaming service is supported Info message Menu 5 8 4 Receive Yes If you select this menu your phone will receive Info service messages No If you select this menu your phone will not receive Info service messages any more Alert Yes Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers No Your phone will no...

Page 241: ...MP3 files from a compatible PC to the memory in your phone using the Mass Storage when you connect the phone to a PC using the USB cable supplied in the same package you just try to connect to PC via USB cable If you use on win98 SE you have to install Mass storage drive for windows 98 on CD ROM Note Because of the small dimension of the speaker in some cases the audio could be distorted especiall...

Page 242: ...usic all randomly Visual effect You can select the visual effect menus Wave Guitarist Aqua This menu allows to changethe backgroud of main LCD and sub LCD on playing MP3 file Playlist Menu 6 1 2 This menu allows to view the whole play list You can move the track by pressing the navigation key In addition if you select option menu you can delete the file or view its information Settings Menu 6 1 3 ...

Page 243: ...xit the Camera Mode Determines whether to take a single or multishot photo Effect Determines the special effect to the picture Flash Determines the flash operation Zoom Determines the zoom rate Video Camera Menu 6 3 This application enables you to record a video clip You can play and watch a saved video file while using this function Once recorded a video clip can be sent via Multimedia message Pr...

Page 244: ...ooth Write multimedia messages You can send a picture via MMS Set as wallpaper You can set a picture as a wallpaper Slide show This menu allows you to view as a slide show automatically Delete You can delete a picture Edit title You can edit the title of picture Information You can view the information about Title Size Date and Time you ve taken My Videos Menu 6 5 You can play and send a video Opt...

Page 245: ...h recording press the left soft key Save 3 Key in Voice memo title press the left soft key OK View list Menu 6 6 2 The phone shows voice memo list You can Playback Send via multimedia and Delete the recorded voice memo Settings Menu 6 7 Camera Menu 6 7 1 Auto save If you set On the images will be saved automatically without displaying menu bar to save Delete all photos This menu allows to delete a...

Page 246: ...urrent time Time format Your can set the time format between 24 hour and 12 hour Phone settings Menu 7 2 You can set functions relating to the phone Display settings Menu 7 2 1 Wallpaper You can select the background pictures in standby mode Default You can select a picture or an animation of wallpaper by pressing Lor R My folder You can select a picture or an animation as wallpaper Standby text I...

Page 247: ... incoming voice calls fax calls and data calls to another number For details contact your service provider All voice calls Diverts voice calls unconditionally If busy Diverts voice calls when the phone is in use If no reply Diverts voice calls which you do not answer If out of reach Diverts voice calls when the phone is switched off or out of coverage All data calls Diverts to a number with a PC c...

Page 248: ... 2 Slide open If you select this menu you can receive an incoming call by simply opening slide Any key If you select this menu you can receive a call by pressing any key except E End key Send key only If you select this menu you can receive a call by only pressing S Send key Send my number Menu 7 3 3 network and subscription dependent Set by network If you select this you can send your phone numbe...

Page 249: ...al in the case of failure to connect a call Off Your phone will not make any attempts to redial when the original call has not connected Security settings Menu 7 4 PIN code request Menu 7 4 1 In this menu you can set the phone to ask for the PIN code of your SIM card when the phone is switched on If this function is activated you ll be requested to enter the PIN code 1 Select PIN code request in t...

Page 250: ... to set the time of Auto key lock Call barring Menu 7 4 4 The Call barring service prevents your phone from making or receiving certain category of calls This function requires the call barring password You can view the following submenus All outgoing calls The barring service for all outgoing calls Outgoing international The barring service for all outgoing international calls Outgoing internatio...

Page 251: ... numbers Disable You can cancel fixed dialling function Number list You can view the number list saved as Fixed dial number Change codes Menu 7 4 6 PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorized person You can change the access codes PIN code PIN2 code Security code 1 If you want to change the Security code PIN PIN2 code input your original code and then pr...

Page 252: ... network Preferred You can set a list of preferred networks that the phone will attempt to register with first before attempting to register to any other networks This list is set from the phone s predefined list of known networks Band selection Menu 7 5 2 Use this to set the network band between two choices GSM 900 1800 or GSM1900 GPRS SETTING Menu 7 6 You can set GPRS service depending on variou...

Page 253: ...homepage is displayed The content depends on the service provider To exit the browser at any time press the E key The phone will return to the previous menu Navigating with the WAP browser You can surf the Internet using either the phone keys or the WAP browser menu Using the phone keys When surfing the Internet the phone keys function differently to phone mode Key Description UD Scrolls each line...

Page 254: ...e deleted To create a bookmark 1 Press the left soft key Options 2 Select Add new and press the OK key 3 After entering the desired URL and title press the OK key After selecting a desired bookmark the following options are available Connect Connects to the selected bookmark Add new Select this to create a new bookmark Edit You can edit the URL and or the title of the selected bookmark Delete Dele...

Page 255: ...ne number to dial to access your WAP gateway User ID The users identity for your dial up server and NOT the WAP gateway Password The password required by your dial up server and NOT the WAP gateway to identify you Call type Select the type of data call Analogue of Digital ISDN Linger time You need to enter timeout period After entering that the WAP navigation service will be unavailable if any dat...

Page 256: ... all context saved in cookie Security A list of the available certification is shown Authority You can see the list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone Personal You can see the list of personal certificates that have been stored in your phone SIM service Menu 8 2 SIM dependent Your service provider can offer special applications through the SIM card such as home banking s...

Page 257: ...ed immediately without a notification Prompt You will be asked before the application makes the connection Never No connection is allowed 70 DOWNLOADS Downloads Note After downloading any Java game press the OK Key O to save it in the root folder Note You cannot remove or rename the preinstalled folder or a game in the folder Note Java is a technology developed by Sun Microsystems Similar to the w...

Page 258: ...compressed format of the Java program and the JAD file is a description file that includes all detailed information From the network prior to download you can view all detailed file descriptions from the JAD file While being based on a standard language J2ME not all Java applications are compatible with all handsets on sale in so far as specific libraries may be used for a telephone model The soft...

Page 259: ...unctionality USB Media Storage allows to handle multimedia files stored in the phone s internal memory 128MB treating it as a common USB memory key This function doesn t require the installation of additional software You can preview JPG Max 460K GIF Max 100K and play sound can be attached in MMS 1 From the phone s stand by screen connect the USB cable to the phone and the PC The PC will identify ...

Page 260: ... phones digital camera and upload new videos on the phone This folder supports the 3GP file format On the phone you can view the files in this folder in the Menu Multimedia My video 5 Once the file transfer is finished disconnect the USB peripheral from Windows and disconnect the cable from the phone 73 Downloads Note Even though you can upload new pictures from the PC the phone won t list them in...

Page 261: ...Install the programs included in the CD ROM 2 On the phone open the menu Tools Modem and confirm the activation 3 Connect the phone to the PC using the USB cable and start the desired program 4 After using the modem it is recommended to deactivate it from the menu Tools Modem 74 DOWNLOADS Downloads Note To connect USB several minutes after power on phone and in the idle window ...

Page 262: ...rol Hold button and microphone After connecting the headset and the controller plug the end of controller into the headset jack on the left side of the phone 75 ACCESSORIES Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements Note Always use genuine LG accessories Failure to do this may invalidate your wa...

Page 263: ...General Product name M6100 System GSM 900 DCS 1800 PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max 55 C discharging 45 C charging Min 10 C 76 TECHNICAL DATA Technical Data ...

Page 264: ...2 1 2002 08 EN 60950 2000 EN 50360 2001 EN50361 2001 EN 300 328 V1 4 1 2003 04 EN 301 511 V 9 0 2 2003 03 Jin Seog Kim Director 7 November 2005 Product Details Applicable Standards Details The conformity to above standards is verified by BABT with Certificate No NC 12584 and GSM test report no WG614666 01 Issue 1 Bluetooth RF test report no TCMD0432545 EMC test report no HCT C05 1006 Safety test r...

Page 265: ...78 MEMO ...

Reviews:

No comments